1. Fanuc
  2. Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is - MA

Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is - MA Operators manual Page 426

Operators manual
PROGRAMMING
B–63014EN/02
15. CUSTOM MACRO
405
In a program, the flow of control can be changed using the GOTO
statement and IF statement. Three types of branch and repetition
operations are used:
Branch and repetition GOTO statement (unconditional branch)
IF statement (conditional branch: if ..., then...)
WHILE statement (repetition while ...)
A branch to sequence number n occurs. When a sequence number outside
of the range 1 to 99999 is specified, P/S alarm No. 128 occurs. A sequence
number can also be specified using an expression.
GOTO n ;
n: Sequence number (1 to 99999)
Example:
GOTO1;
GOTO#10;
Specify a conditional expression after IF.
If the specified conditional expression is satisfied, a branch to sequence
number n occurs. If the specified condition is not satisfied, the next block
is executed.
IF [#1 GT 10] GOTO 2 ;
N2 G00 G91 X10.0 ;
:
If the value of variable #1 is greater than 10, a branch to sequence number
N2 occurs.
If the condi-
tion is not sa-
tisfied
Processing If the condition is satisfied
If the specified conditional expression is satisfied, a predetermined macro
statement is executed. Only a single macro statement is executed.
IF [#1 EQ #2] THEN#3=0 ;
If the values of #1 and #2 are the same, 0 is assigned to #3.
A conditional expression must include an operator inserted between two
variables or between a variable and constant, and must be enclosed in
brackets ([, ]). An expression can be used instead of a variable.
15.5
BRANCH AND
REPETITION
15.5.1
Unconditional Branch
(GOTO Statement)
15.5.2
Conditional Branch
(IF Statement)
IF[<conditional
expression>]GOTOn
IF[<conditional
expression>]THEN
Explanations
D Conditional expression
Previous page
Next page

Contents Summary of Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is - MA Operators manual

  • Page 1GE Fanuc Automation Europe Computer Numerical Controls FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/ 160is/180is-MA OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-63014EN/02 TECHNOLOGY AND MORE
  • Page 2
  • Page 3SAFETY PRECAUTIONS This section describes the safety precautions related to the use of CNC units. It is essential that these precautions be observed by users to ensure the safe operation of machines equipped with a CNC unit (all descriptions in this section assume this configuration). Note that some
  • Page 4SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B–63014EN/02 1 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety. Also, supplementary information i
  • Page 5B–63014EN/02 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 2 GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS WARNING 1. Never attempt to machine a workpiece without first checking the operation of the machine. Before starting a production run, ensure that the machine is operating correctly by performing a trial run using, for example, the sing
  • Page 6SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B–63014EN/02 WARNING 8. Some functions may have been implemented at the request of the machine–tool builder. When using such functions, refer to the manual supplied by the machine–tool builder for details of their use and any related cautions. NOTE Programs, parameters, and macro
  • Page 7B–63014EN/02 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 3 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO PROGRAMMING This section covers the major safety precautions related to programming. Before attempting to perform programming, read the supplied operator’s manual and programming manual carefully such that you are fully familiar with
  • Page 8SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B–63014EN/02 WARNING 6. Stroke check After switching on the power, perform a manual reference position return as required. Stroke check is not possible before manual reference position return is performed. Note that when stroke check is disabled, an alarm is not issued even if a s
  • Page 9B–63014EN/02 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 4 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO HANDLING This section presents safety precautions related to the handling of machine tools. Before attempting to operate your machine, read the supplied operator’s manual and programming manual carefully, such that you are fully fami
  • Page 10SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B–63014EN/02 WARNING 7. Workpiece coordinate system shift Manual intervention, machine lock, or mirror imaging may shift the workpiece coordinate system. Before attempting to operate the machine under the control of a program, confirm the coordinate system carefully. If the machin
  • Page 11B–63014EN/02 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 5 WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE WARNING 1. Memory backup battery replacement Only those personnel who have received approved safety and maintenance training may perform this work. When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the high–voltage circuits
  • Page 12SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B–63014EN/02 WARNING 2. Absolute pulse coder battery replacement Only those personnel who have received approved safety and maintenance training may perform this work. When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the high–voltage circuits (marked and fitted with an insula
  • Page 13B–63014EN/02 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING 3. Fuse replacement Before replacing a blown fuse, however, it is necessary to locate and remove the cause of the blown fuse. For this reason, only those personnel who have received approved safety and maintenance training may perform this work. When replacing
  • Page 14B–63014EN/02 Table of Contents SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–1 I. GENERAL 1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
  • Page 15Table of Contents B–63014EN/02 4.12 SMOOTH INTERPOLATION (G05.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 4.13 NURBS INTERPOLATION (G06.2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 4.14
  • Page 16B–63014EN/02 Table of Contents 9.2 SPECIFYING THE SPINDLE SPEED VALUE DIRECTLY (S5–DIGIT COMMAND) . . . . . . . . . 145 9.3 CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL (G96, G97) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 9.4 SPINDLE SPEED FLUCTUATION DETECTION FUNCTION (G25, G26) . . .
  • Page 17Table of Contents B–63014EN/02 13.4 GRINDING–WHEEL WEAR COMPENSATION BY CONTINUOUS DRESSING (FOR GRINDING MACHINE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 13.5 AUTOMATIC GRINDING WHEEL DIAMETER COMPENSATION AFTER DRESSING . . . .
  • Page 18B–63014EN/02 Table of Contents 15.3 ARITHMETIC AND LOGIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 15.4 MACRO STATEMENTS AND NC STATEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 15.5 BRANCH AND REPETITIO
  • Page 19Table of Contents B–63014EN/02 20.3 TOOL WITHDRAWAL AND RETURN (G10.6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 20.4 TANDEM CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 20.
  • Page 20B–63014EN/02 Table of Contents 2.4 EXTERNAL I/O DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568 2.4.1 FANUC Handy File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
  • Page 21Table of Contents B–63014EN/02 5. TEST OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666 5.1 MACHINE LOCK AND AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667 5.2 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE . . . .
  • Page 22B–63014EN/02 Table of Contents 8.10.6 Inputting and Outputting Floppy Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 731 8.10.7 Memory Card Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
  • Page 23Table of Contents B–63014EN/02 11.2 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY PROG (IN MEMORY MODE OR MDI MODE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823 11.2.1 Program Contents Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
  • Page 24B–63014EN/02 Table of Contents IV. MAINTENANCE 1. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941 1.1 REPLACING BATTERY FOR LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 942 1.2 REPLACING THE BATTERY FOR STAND–ALONE
  • Page 25I. GENERA
  • Page 26B–63014EN/02 GENERAL 1. GENERAL 1 GENERAL This manual consists of the following parts: About this manual I. GENERAL Describes chapter organization, applicable models, related manuals, and notes for reading this manual. II. PROGRAMMING Describes each function: Format used to program functions in the
  • Page 271. GENERAL GENERAL B–63014EN/02 Special symbols This manual uses the following symbols: IP_ : Indicates a combination of axes such as X__ Y__ Z (used in PROGRAMMING.). ; : Indicates the end of a block. It actually corre- sponds to the ISO code LF or EIA code CR. Related manuals The table below lists
  • Page 28B–63014EN/02 GENERAL 1. GENERAL Related manuals of SERVO MOTOR Related manuals of SERVO MOTOR α series, β series α series, β series Specification Manual name number FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR α series DESCRIPTIONS B–65142E FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR α series PARAMETER B–65150E MANUAL FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR α se
  • Page 291. GENERAL GENERAL B–63014EN/02 Related manuals of OPEN CNC Related manuals of OPEN CNC Specification Manual name number FANUC OPEN CNC OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–62884EN (LADDER EDITING PACKAGE) FANUC OPEN CNC OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–62994EN (Basic Operation Package 1 (for Windows 95/NT)) FANUC OPEN CNC OPERA
  • Page 30B–63014EN/02 GENERAL 1. GENERAL 1.1 When machining the part using the CNC machine tool, first prepare the program, then operate the CNC machine by using the program. GENERAL FLOW OF OPERATION OF CNC 1) First, prepare the program from a part drawing to operate the CNC machine tool. MACHINE TOOL How t
  • Page 311. GENERAL GENERAL B–63014EN/02 Tool Side cutting Face cutting Hole machining Prepare the program of the tool path and machining condition according to the workpiece figure, for each machining. 8
  • Page 32B–63014EN/02 GENERAL 1. GENERAL 1.2 NOTES ON READING NOTE THIS MANUAL 1 The function of an CNC machine tool system depends not only on the CNC, but on the combination of the machine tool, its magnetic cabinet, the servo system, the CNC, the operator’s panels, etc. It is too difficult to describe the
  • Page 33II. PROGRAMMIN
  • Page 34B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 1. GENERAL 1 GENERAL 13
  • Page 351. GENERAL PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 1.1 The tool moves along straight lines and arcs constituting the workpiece parts figure (See II–4). TOOL MOVEMENT ALONG WORKPIECE PARTS FIGURE– INTERPOLATION Explanations The function of moving the tool along straight lines and arcs is called the interpolation. D
  • Page 36B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 1. GENERAL Symbols of the programmed commands G01, G02, ... are called the preparatory function and specify the type of interpolation conducted in the control unit. (a) Movement along straight line (b) Movement along arc G01 Y_ _; G03X––Y––R––; X– –Y– – – –; Control unit X a
  • Page 371. GENERAL PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 1.2 Movement of the tool at a specified speed for cutting a workpiece is called the feed. FEED–FEED FUNCTION mm/min Tool F Workpiece Table Fig. 1.2 (a) Feed function Feedrates can be specified by using actual numerics. For example, to feed the tool at a rate of 15
  • Page 38B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 1. GENERAL 1.3 PART DRAWING AND TOOL MOVEMENT 1.3.1 A CNC machine tool is provided with a fixed position. Normally, tool Reference Position change and programming of absolute zero point as described later are performed at this position. This position is called the reference
  • Page 391. GENERAL PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 1.3.2 Coordinate System on Part Drawing and Z Coordinate System Z Specified by CNC – Program Y Y Coordinate System X X Coordinate system Part drawing CNC Command Tool Z Y Workpiece X Machine tool Fig. 1.3.2 (a) Coordinate system Explanations D Coordinate system Th
  • Page 40B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 1. GENERAL The positional relation between these two coordinate systems is determined when a workpiece is set on the table. Coordinate system on part drawing estab- lished on the work- Coordinate system spe- piece cified by the CNC estab- lished on the table Y Y Workpiece X
  • Page 411. GENERAL PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 (2) Mounting a workpiece directly against the jig Program zero point Jig Meet the tool center to the reference position. And set the coordinate system specified by CNC at this position. (Jig shall be mounted on the predetermined point from the reference position.)
  • Page 42B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 1. GENERAL 1.3.3 How to Indicate Command Dimensions for Moving the Tool – Absolute, Incremental Commands Explanations Command for moving the tool can be indicated by absolute command or incremental command (See II–8.1). D Absolute command The tool moves to a point at “the di
  • Page 431. GENERAL PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 1.4 The speed of the tool with respect to the workpiece when the workpiece is cut is called the cutting speed. CUTTING SPEED – As for the CNC, the cutting speed can be specified by the spindle speed SPINDLE SPEED in rpm unit. FUNCTION Tool Tool diameter Spindle sp
  • Page 44B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 1. GENERAL 1.5 When drilling, tapping, boring, milling or the like, is performed, it is necessary to select a suitable tool. When a number is assigned to each tool SELECTION OF TOOL and the number is specified in the program, the corresponding tool is USED FOR VARIOUS select
  • Page 451. GENERAL PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 1.6 When machining is actually started, it is necessary to rotate the spindle, and feed coolant. For this purpose, on–off operations of spindle motor and COMMAND FOR coolant valve should be controlled. MACHINE OPERATIONS – MISCELLANEOUS Tool FUNCTION Coolant Workp
  • Page 46B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 1. GENERAL 1.7 A group of commands given to the CNC for operating the machine is called the program. By specifying the commands, the tool is moved along PROGRAM a straight line or an arc, or the spindle motor is turned on and off. CONFIGURATION In the program, specify the co
  • Page 471. GENERAL PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Explanations The block and the program have the following configurations. D Block 1 block N ffff G ff Xff.f Yfff.f M ff S ff T ff ; Sequence Preparatory Dimension word Miscel- Spindle Tool number function laneous function func- function tion End of block Fig. 1.7
  • Page 48B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 1. GENERAL D Main program and When machining of the same pattern appears at many portions of a subprogram program, a program for the pattern is created. This is called the subprogram. On the other hand, the original program is called the main program. When a subprogram execu
  • Page 491. GENERAL PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 1.8 TOOL FIGURE AND TOOL MOTION BY PROGRAM Explanations D Machining using the end Usually, several tools are used for machining one workpiece. The tools of cutter – Tool length have different tool length. It is very troublesome to change the program compensation f
  • Page 50B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 1. GENERAL 1.9 Limit switches are installed at the ends of each axis on the machine to prevent tools from moving beyond the ends. The range in which tools can TOOL MOVEMENT move is called the stroke. RANGE – STROKE Table Motor Limit switch Machine zero point Specify these di
  • Page 512. CONTROLLED AXES PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 2 CONTROLLED AXES 30
  • Page 52B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 2. CONTROLLED AXES 2.1 CONTROLLED AXES Series 16, Series 160 16i–MA 16i–MA, 160i–MA Item 160i–MA (two–path control) No. of basic controlled 3 axes for each path 3 axes axes (6 axes in total) Controlled axes Max. 8 axes Max. 7 axes for each path expansion (total) (included in
  • Page 532. CONTROLLED AXES PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 2.2 The names of three basic axes are always X, Y, and Z. The name of an additional axis can be set to A, B, C, U, V, or W by using parameter 1020. AXIS NAME Parameter No. 1020 is used to determine the name of each axis. When this parameter is set to 0 or
  • Page 54B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 2. CONTROLLED AXES 2.3 The increment system consists of the least input increment (for input) and least command increment (for output). The least input increment is the INCREMENT SYSTEM least increment for programming the travel distance. The least command increment is the l
  • Page 552. CONTROLLED AXES PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 2.4 Maximum stroke = Least command increment 99999999 See 2.3 Incremen System. MAXIMUM STROKE Table 2.4 (a) Maximum strokes Increment system Maximum stroke Metric machine system "99999.999 mm "99999.999 deg IS–B Inch machine system "9999.9999 inch "99999.9
  • Page 563. PREPARATORY FUNCTION B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING (G FUNCTION) 3 PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION) A number following address G determines the meaning of the command for the concerned block. G codes are divided into the following two types. Type Meaning One–shot G code The G code is effective only in
  • Page 573. PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Explanations 1. When the clear state (bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402) is set at power–up or reset, the modal G codes are placed in the states described below. (1) The modal G codes are placed in the states marked with as indicated in T
  • Page 583. PREPARATORY FUNCTION B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING (G FUNCTION) Table 3 G code list (1/3) G code Group Function G00 Positioning G01 Linear interpolation G02 Circular interpolation/Helical interpolation CW 01 G03 Circular interpolation/Helical interpolation CCW G02.2, G03.2 Involute interpolation G02.3
  • Page 593. PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Table 3 G code list (2/3) G code Group Function G37 Automatic tool length measurment 00 G39 Corner offset circular interpolation G40 Cutter compensation cancel/Three dimensional compensation cancel G41 07 Cutter compensation left/Three di
  • Page 603. PREPARATORY FUNCTION B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING (G FUNCTION) Table 3 G code list (3/3) G code Group Function G65 00 Macro call G66 Macro modal call 12 G67 Macro modal call cancel G68 Coordinate rotation/Three dimensional coordinate conversion 16 G69 Coordinate rotation cancel/Three dimensional coor
  • Page 614. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 4 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 40
  • Page 62B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 4.1 The G00 command moves a tool to the position in the workpiece system POSITIONING (G00) specified with an absolute or an incremental command at a rapid traverse rate. In the absolute command, coordinate value of the end point is programmed. In t
  • Page 634. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Limitations The rapid traverse rate cannot be specified in the address F. Even if linear interpolation positioning is specified, nonlinear interpolation positioning is used in the following cases. Therefore, be careful to ensure that the tool does
  • Page 64B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 4.2 For accurate positioning without play of the machine (backlash), final positioning from one direction is available. SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING (G60) Overrun Start position Start position Temporary stop End position Format G60IP_; IP_ : For an
  • Page 654. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Restrictions D During canned cycle for drilling, no single direction positioning is effected in Z axis. D No single direction positioning is effected in an axis for which no overrun has been set by the parameter. D When the move distance 0 is comma
  • Page 66B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 4.3 Tools can move along a line LINEAR INTERPOLATION (G01) Format G01 IP_F_; IP_:For an absolute command, the coordinates of an end point , and for an incremental commnad, the distance the tool moves. F_:Speed of tool feed (Feedrate) Explanations A
  • Page 674. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 A calcula;tion example is as follows. G91 G01 X20.0B40.0 F300.0 ; This changes the unit of the C axis from 40.0 deg to 40mm with metric input. The time required for distribution is calculated as follows: Ǹ20 2 ) 40 2 8 0.14907 (min) 300 The feed ra
  • Page 68B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 4.4 The command below will move a tool along a circular arc. CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (G02, G03) Format Arc in the XpYp plane G02 I_ J_ G17 Xp_Yp_ F_ ; G03 R_ Arc in the ZpXp plane G02 I_ K_ G18 Xp_ p_ F_ G03 R_ Arc in the YpZp plane G19 G02 J_ K_ F_
  • Page 694. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Explanations D Direction of the circular “Clockwise”(G02) and “counterclockwise”(G03) on the XpYp plane interpolation (ZpXp plane or YpZp plane) are defined when the XpYp plane is viewed in the positive–to–negative direction of the Zp axis (Yp axis
  • Page 70B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS D Arc radius The distance between an arc and the center of a circle that contains the arc can be specified using the radius, R, of the circle instead of I, J, and K. In this case, one arc is less than 180°, and the other is more than 180° are consi
  • Page 714. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Examples Y axis 100 50R 60 60R 40 0 X axis 90 120 140 200 The above tool path can be programmed as follows ; (1) In absolute programming G92X200.0 Y40.0 Z0 ; G90 G03 X140.0 Y100.0R60.0 F300.; G02 X120.0 Y60.0R50.0 ; or G92X200.0 Y40.0Z0 ; G90 G03 X
  • Page 72B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 4.5 Helical interpolation which moved helically is enabled by specifying up HELICAL to two other axes which move synchronously with the circular INTERPOLATION interpolation by circular commands. (G02, G03) Format Synchronously with arc of XpYp plan
  • Page 734. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 4.6 Helical interpolation B moves the tool in a helical manner. This interpolation can be executed by specifying the circular interpolation HELICAL command together with up to four additional axes in simple INTERPOLATION B high–precision contour co
  • Page 74B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 4.7 Spiral interpolation is enabled by specifying the circular interpolation command together with a desired number of revolutions or a desired SPIRAL increment (decrement) for the radius per revolution. INTERPOLATION, Conical interpolation is enab
  • Page 754. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Conical interpolation XpYp plane G02 G17 X_ Y_ I_ J_ Q_ L_ F_ ; G03 ZpXp plane G02 G18 Z_X_K_ I_ Q_ L_ F_ ; G03 YpZp plane G19 G02 Y_ Z_ J_ K_ Q_ L_ F_ ; G03 X,Y,Z Coordinates of the end point L Number of revolutions (positive value without a dec
  • Page 76B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS Explanations D Function of spiral Spiral interpolation in the XY plane is defined as follows: interpolation (X – X0)2 + (Y – Y0)2 = (R + Q’)2 X0 : X coordinate of the center Y0 : Y coordinate of the center R : Radius at the beginning of spiral inte
  • Page 774. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Limitations D Radius In spiral or conical interpolation, R for specifying an arc radius cannot be specified. D Corner deceleration Corner deceleration between the spiral/conical interpolation block and other blocks can be performed only in simple h
  • Page 78B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS (1) With absolute values, the path is programmed as follows: Q–20.0 G90 G02 X0 Y–30.0 I0 J–100.0 F300; L4 (2) With incremental values, the path is programmed as follows: Q–20.0 G91 G02 X0 Y–130.0 I0 J–100.0 F300; L4 (Either the Q or L setting can b
  • Page 794. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 4.8 Polar coordinate interpolation is a function that exercises contour control in converting a command programmed in a Cartesian coordinate system POLAR COORDINATE to the movement of a linear axis (movement of a tool) and the movement INTERPOLATIO
  • Page 80B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS D Distance moved and In the polar coordinate interpolation mode, program commands are feedrate for polar specified with Cartesian coordinates on the polar coordinate interpolation coordinate interpolation plane. The axis address for the rotation ax
  • Page 814. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Tool length offset Tool length offset must be specified in the polar coordinate interpolation command cancel mode before G12.1 is specified. It cannot be specified in the polar coordinate interpolation mode. Furthermore, no offset values can be c
  • Page 82B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS Examples Example of Polar Coordinate Interpolation Program Based on X Axis(Linear Axis) and C Axis (Rotary Axis) C’(hypothetical axis) C axis Path after cutter compensation Program path N204 N203 N205 N202 N201 N200 X axis Tool N208 N206 N207 Z axi
  • Page 834. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 4.9 The amount of travel of a rotary axis specified by an angle is once internally converted to a distance of a linear axis along the outer surface CYLINDRICAL so that linear interpolation or circular interpolation can be performed with INTERPOLATI
  • Page 84B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS D Tool offset To perform tool offset in the cylindrical interpolation mode, cancel any ongoing cutter compensation mode before entering the cylindrical interpolation mode. Then, start and terminate tool offset within the cylindrical interpolation m
  • Page 854. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Examples Example of a Cylindrical Interpolation Program C O0001 (CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION ); N01 G00 G90 Z100.0 C0 ; N02 G01 G91 G18 Z0 C0 ; Z R N03 G07.1 C57299 ; N04 G90 G01 G42 Z120.0 D01 F250 ; N05 C30.0 ; N06 G02 Z90.0 C60.0 R30.0 ; N07 G01 Z
  • Page 86B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 4.10 Involute curve machining can be performed by using involute interpolation. Involute interpolation ensures continuous pulse distribution INVOLUTE even in high–speed operation in small blocks, thus enabling smooth and INTERPOLATION high–speed ma
  • Page 874. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Format Involute interpolation on the X–Y plane G17 G02.2 X__Y__I__J__R__F__ ; G17 G03.2 X__Y__I__J__R__F__ ; Involute interpolation on the Z–X plane G18 G02.2 Z__X__K__I__R__F__ ; G18 G03.2 Z__X__K__I__R__F__ ; Involute interpolation on the Y–Z pla
  • Page 88B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS Explanations D Involute curve An involute curve on the X–Y plane is defined as follows ; X (θ)=R [cos θ+ (θ-θ0 ) sin θ] +X0 Y (θ)=R [sin θ- (θ-θ0 ) cos θ] +Y0 where, X0 , Y0 : Coordinates of the center of a base circle R : Base circle radius θ0 : A
  • Page 894. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Choosing from two types When only a start point and I, J, and K data are given, two types of involute of involute curves curves can be created. One type of involute curve extends towards the base circle, and the other extends away from the base c
  • Page 90B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS D Specifiable G codes The following G codes can be specified in involute interpolation mode: G04 : Dwell G10 : Data setting G17 : X–Y plane selection G18 : Z–X plane selection G19 : Y–Z plane selection G65 : Macro call G66 : Macro modal call G67 :
  • Page 914. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Limitations D Number of involute curve Both the start point and end point must be within 100 turns from the point turns where the involute curve starts. An involute curve can be specified to make one or more turns in a single block. If the specifie
  • Page 92B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 4.11 Exponential interpolation exponentially changes the rotation of a workpiece with respect to movement on the rotary axis. Furthermore, EXPONENTIAL exponential interpolation performs linear interpolation with respect to INTERPOLATION another axi
  • Page 934. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Explanations D Exponential relational Exponential relational expressions for a linear axis and rotary axis are expressions defined as follows: θ 1 X(θ)=R (e k –1) tan (I) ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ Movement on the linear axis (1) θ A(q)=(–1)w 360 2π ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ Mov
  • Page 94B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS CAUTION The amount for dividing the linear axis for exponential interpolation (span value) affects figure precision. However, if an excessively small value is set, the machine may stop during interpolation. Try to specify an optimal span value depe
  • Page 954. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Relational expressions θ r tan (B) +Z (0) Z (θ) = { –U tan (I) } (e k –1) ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ (3) 2 tan (I) θ r 1 X (θ) = { –U tan (I) } (e k –1) ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ (4) 2 tan (I) θ A (q) = (–1)w 360 2π where K = tan (J) tan (I) X (q), Z (q), A (q) : Abso
  • Page 96B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 4.12 Either of two types of machining can be selected, depending on the program command. SMOOTH INTERPOLATION D For those portions where the accuracy of the figure is critical, such as at corners, machining is performed exactly as specified by the
  • Page 974. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 When a program approximates a sculptured curve with line segments, the length of each segment differs between those portions that have mainly a small radius of curvature and those that have mainly a large radius of curvature. The length of the line
  • Page 98B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS Examples Interpolated by smooth curve N17 N16 N15 N14 N13 N12 N11 N1 N2 N10 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 Interpolated by smooth curve Linearinterpolation Linearinterpolation N17 N16 N15 N14 N13 N12 N1 N11 N2 N10 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 D Conditions for Smooth
  • Page 994. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Limitations D Controlled axes Smooth interpolation can be specified only for the X–, Y–, and Z–axes and any axes parallel to these axes (up to three axes at one time). D High–precision contour Commands for turning on and off smooth interpolation mo
  • Page 100B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 4.13 Many computer–aided design (CAD) systems used to design metal dies for automobiles and airplanes utilize non–uniform rational B–spline NURBS (NURBS) to express a sculptured surface or curve for the metal dies. INTERPOLATION This function enabl
  • Page 1014. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Format G05 P10000 ; (Start high–precision contour control mode) ... G06.2 [P_] K_ X_ Y_ Z_ [R_] [F_] ; K_ X_ Y_ Z_ [R_] ; K_ X_ Y_ Z_ [R_] ; K_ X_ Y_ Z_ [R_] ; ... K_ X_ Y_ Z_ [R_] ; K_ ; ... K_ ; G01 ... ... G05 P0 ; (End high–precision contour co
  • Page 102B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS D Knot The number of specified knots must equal the number of control points plus the rank value. In the blocks specifying the first to last control points, each control point and a knot are specified in an identical block. After these blocks, as m
  • Page 1034. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Alarms Displayed No. Description message PS5115 SPL: Error An illegal rank is specified. No knot is specified. An illegal knot is specified. Too many axes are specified. Other program error. PS5116 SPL: Error A look–ahead block contains a program e
  • Page 104B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS Z Y 1000. X 2000. 83
  • Page 1054. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 4.14 In helical interpolation, when pulses are distributed with one of the circular interpolation axes set to a hypothetical axis, sine interpolation is HYPOTHETICAL AXIS enabled. INTERPOLATION When one of the circular interpolation axes is set to
  • Page 106B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS Limitations D Manual operation The hypothetical axis can be used only in automatic operation. In manual operation, it is not used, and movement takes place. D Move command Specify hypothetical axis interpolation only in the incremental mode. D Coor
  • Page 1074. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 4.15 Straight threads with a constant lead can be cut. The position coder mounted on the spindle reads the spindle speed in real–time. The read THREAD CUTTING spindle speed is converted to the feedrate per minute to feed the tool. (G33) Format Z G3
  • Page 108B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS NOTE 1 The spindle speed is limited as follows : Maximum feedrate 1 x spindle speed x Thread lead Spindle speed : rpm Thread lead : mm or inch Maximum feedrate : mm/min or inch/min ; maximum command–specified feedrate for feed–per–minute mode or ma
  • Page 1094. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 4.16 Linear interpolation can be commanded by specifying axial move following the G31 command, like G01. If an external skip signal is input SKIP FUNCTION during the execution of this command, execution of the command is (G31) interrupted and the n
  • Page 110B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS Examples D The next block to G31 is an incremental command G31 G91X100.0 F100; Y50.0; Skip signal is input here 50.0 Y 100.0 Actual motion X Motion without skip signal Fig. 4.16 (a) The next block is an incremental command D The next block to G31 i
  • Page 1114. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 4.17 In a block specifying P1 to P4 after G31, the multistage skip function stores coordinates in a custom macro variable when a skip signal (4–point MULTISTAGE SKIP or 8–point ; 8–point when a high–speed skip signal is used) is turned on. (G31) Pa
  • Page 112B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 4.18 The skip function operates based on a high–speed skip signal (connected directly to the NC; not via the PMC) instead of an ordinary skip signal. HIGH SPEED SKIP In this case, up to eight signals can be input. SIGNAL (G31) Delay and error of sk
  • Page 1134. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 4.19 The continuous high–speed skip function enables reading of absolute coordinates by using the high–speed skip signal. Once a high–speed skip CONTINUOUS signal has been input in a G31P90 block, absolute coordinates are read HIGH–SPEED SKIP into
  • Page 114B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 5. FEED FUNCTIONS 5 FEED FUNCTIONS 93
  • Page 1155. FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 5.1 The feed functions control the feedrate of the tool. The following two feed functions are available: GENERAL D Feed functions 1. Rapid traverse When the positioning command (G00) is specified, the tool moves at a rapid traverse feedrate set in the CNC (
  • Page 116B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 5. FEED FUNCTIONS D Tool path in a cutting If the direction of movement changes between specified blocks during feed cutting feed, a rounded–corner path may result (Fig. 5.1 (b)). Y Programmed path Actual tool path 0 X Fig. 5.1 (b) Example of Tool Path between Two Blocks In
  • Page 1175. FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 5.2 RAPID TRAVERSE Format G00 IP_IP ; G00 : G code (group 01) for positioning (rapid traverse) IP_ ; Dimension word for the end point IP Explanations The positioning command (G00) positions the tool by rapid traverse. In rapid traverse, the next block is ex
  • Page 118B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 5. FEED FUNCTIONS 5.3 Feedrate of linear interpolation (G01), circular interpolation (G02, G03), etc. are commanded with numbers after the F code. CUTTING FEED In cutting feed, the next block is executed so that the feedrate change from the previous block is minimized. Four
  • Page 1195. FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Feed per minute (G94) After specifying G94 (in the feed per minute mode), the amount of feed of the tool per minute is to be directly specified by setting a number after F. G94 is a modal code. Once a G94 is specified, it is valid until G95 (feed per revo
  • Page 120B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 5. FEED FUNCTIONS D Inverse time feed (G93) When G93 is specified, the inverse time specification mode (G93 mode) is set. Specify the inverse time (FRN) with an F code. A value from 0.001 to 9999.999 can be specified as FRN, regardless of whether the input mode is inches or
  • Page 1215. FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 G93 is a modal G code and belongs to group 05 (includes G95 (feed per revolution) and G94 (feed per minute)). When an F value is specified in G93 mode and the feedrate exceeds the maximum cutting feedrate, the feedrate is clamped to the maximum cutting feed
  • Page 122B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 5. FEED FUNCTIONS D One–digit F code feed When a one–digit number from 1 to 9 is specified after F, the feedrate set for that number in a parameter (Nos. 1451 to 1459) is used. When F0 is specified, the rapid traverse rate is applied. The feedrate corresponding to the number
  • Page 1235. FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 5.4 Cutting feedrate can be controlled, as indicated in Table 5.4 (a). CUTTING FEEDRATE CONTROL Table 5.4 (a) Cutting Feedrate Control Function name G code Validity of G code Description The tool is decelerated at the end point This function is valid for sp
  • Page 124B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 5. FEED FUNCTIONS Format Exact stop IP ; G09 IP_ Exact stop mode G61 ; Cutting mode G64 ; Tapping mode G63 ; Automatic corner override G62 ; 5.4.1 Exact Stop (G09, G61) Cutting Mode (G64) Tapping Mode (G63) Explanations The inter–block paths followed by the tool in the exact
  • Page 1255. FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 5.4.2 When cutter compensation is performed, the movement of the tool is Automatic Corner automatically decelerated at an inner corner and internal circular area. This reduces the load on the cutter and produces a smoothly machined Override surface. 5.4.2.1
  • Page 126B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 5. FEED FUNCTIONS Override range When a corner is determined to be an inner corner, the feedrate is overridden before and after the inner corner. The distances Ls and Le, where the feedrate is overridden, are distances from points on the cutter center path to the corner (Fig
  • Page 1275. FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Regarding program (2) of an arc, the feedrate is overridden from point a to point b and from point c to point d (Fig. 5.4.2.1 (d)). Programmed path d a Le Ls Le Ls c b (2) Cutter center path Tool Fig. 5.4.2.1 (d) Override Range (Straight Line to Arc, Arc to
  • Page 128B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 5. FEED FUNCTIONS 5.4.2.2 For internally offset circular cutting, the feedrate on a programmed path Internal Circular Cutting is set to a specified feedrate (F) by specifying the circular cutting feedrate with respect to F, as indicated below (Fig. 5.4.2.2). This function is
  • Page 1295. FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 5.4.3 This function automatically controls the feedrate at a corner according to Automatic Corner the corner angle between the machining blocks or the feedrate difference between the blocks along each axis. Deceleration This function is effective when ACD,
  • Page 130B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 5. FEED FUNCTIONS D Feedrate and time When the corner angle is smaller than the angle specified in the parameter, the relationship between the feedrate and time is as shown below. Although accumulated pulses equivalent to the hatched area remain at time t, the next block is
  • Page 1315. FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 1. Between linear movements 2. Between linear and circular movements 3. Between circular movements (angle between the linear movement (angle between the tangents to and tangent to the circular movement) the circular movements) θ θ θ θ D Selected plane The m
  • Page 132B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 5. FEED FUNCTIONS 5.4.3.2 This function decelerates the feedrate when the difference between the Corner Deceleration feedrates at the end point of block A and the start point of block B along each axis is larger than the value specified in parameter No. 1781. The According t
  • Page 1335. FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Acceleration / When acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is effective, the deceleration before relationship between the feedrate and time is as described below. interpolation When the feedrate difference between blocks A and B along each axis is
  • Page 134B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 5. FEED FUNCTIONS Without corner deceleration With corner deceleration Feedrate along Vc [X] Vmax the X–axis Vmax Feedrate along the Y–axis Vc [Y] Vmax Feedrate along the tangent at the corner 1 F Rmax N1 N2 t D Setting the allowable The allowable feedrate difference can be
  • Page 1355. FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Look–ahead control Parameters related to automatic corner deceleration in look–ahead control mode are shown below. Normal Look–ahead Parameter description mode control mode Switching the methods for automatic corner No.1602#4 No.1602#4 deceleration Allowa
  • Page 136B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 5. FEED FUNCTIONS 5.5 DWELL (G04) Format Dwell G04 X_ ; or G04 P_ ; X_ : Specify a time (decimal point permitted) P_ : Specify a time (decimal point not permitted) Explanations By specifying a dwell, the execution of the next block is delayed by the specified time. In additi
  • Page 1376. REFERENCE POSITION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 6 REFERENCE POSITION A CNC machine tool has a special position where, generally, the tool is exchanged or the coordinate system is set, as described later. This position is referred to as a reference position. 116
  • Page 138B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 6. REFERENCE POSITION 6.1 REFERENCE POSITION RETURN General D Reference position The reference position is a fixed position on a machine tool to which the tool can easily be moved by the reference position return function. For example, the reference position is used as a pos
  • Page 1396. REFERENCE POSITION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Reference position Tools are automatically moved to the reference position via an return and movement intermediate position along a specified axis. Or, tools are automatically from the reference moved from the reference position to a specified positio
  • Page 140B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 6. REFERENCE POSITION Explanations D Reference position Positioning to the intermediate or reference positions are performed at the return (G28) rapid traverse rate of each axis. Therefore, for safety, the cutter compensation, and tool length compensation should be cancelled
  • Page 1416. REFERENCE POSITION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 NOTE 1 To this feedrate, a rapid traverse override (F0 ,25,50,100%) is applied, for which the setting is 100%. 2 After a machine coordinate system has been established upon the completion of reference position return, the automatic reference position re
  • Page 142B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 6. REFERENCE POSITION Restrictions D Status the machine lock The lamp for indicating the completion of return does not go on when the being turned on machine lock is turned on, even when the tool has automatically returned to the reference position. In this case, it is not c
  • Page 1436. REFERENCE POSITION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 6.2 Tools ca be returned to the floating reference position. A floating reference point is a position on a machine tool, and serves as FLOATING a reference point for machine tool operation. REFERENCE A floating reference point need not always be fixed,
  • Page 144B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 7. COORDINATE SYSTEM 7 COORDINATE SYSTEM By teaching the CNC a desired tool position, the tool can be moved to the position. Such a tool position is represented by coordinates in a coordinate system. Coordinates are specified using program axes. When three program axes, the
  • Page 1457. COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 7.1 The point that is specific to a machine and serves as the reference of the machine is referred to as the machine zero point. A machine tool builder MACHINE sets a machine zero point for each machine. COORDINATE A coordinate system with a machine zero
  • Page 146B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 7. COORDINATE SYSTEM 7.2 A coordinate system used for machining a workpiece is referred to as a workpiece coordinate system. A workpiece coordinate system is to be set WORKPIECE with the CNC beforehand (setting a workpiece coordinate system). COORDINATE A machining program s
  • Page 1477. COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 7.2.2 The user can choose from set workpiece coordinate systems as described below. (For information about the methods of setting, see II– 7.2.1.) Selecting a Workpiece (1) Once a workpiece coordinate system is selected by G92 or automatic Coordinate Sys
  • Page 148B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 7. COORDINATE SYSTEM 7.2.3 The six workpiece coordinate systems specified with G54 to G59 can be changed by changing an external workpiece zero point offset value Changing Workpiece or workpiece zero point offset value. Coordinate System Three methods are available to change
  • Page 1497. COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Explanations D Changing by G10 With the G10 command, each workpiece coordinate system can be changed separately. D Changing by G92 By specifying G92IP_;, a workpiece coordinate system (selected with a code from G54 to G59) is shifted to set a new workpie
  • Page 150B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 7. COORDINATE SYSTEM Examples Y YȀ G54 workpiece coordinate system If G92X100Y100; is commanded when the tool 100 is positioned at (200, 160) in G54 mode, work- 160 Tool position piece coordinate system 1 (X’ – Y’) shifted by vector A is created. 60 A XȀ New workpiece coordi
  • Page 1517. COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 7.2.4 The workpiece coordinate system preset function presets a workpiece coordinate system shifted by manual intervention to the pre–shift Workpiece Coordinate workpiece coordinate system. The latter system is displaced from the System Preset (G92.1) ma
  • Page 152B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 7. COORDINATE SYSTEM (a) Manual intervention performed when the manual absolute signal is off (b) Move command executed in the machine lock state (c) Movement by handle interrupt (d) Operation using the mirror image function (e) Setting the local coordinate system using G52,
  • Page 1537. COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 7.2.5 Besides the six workpiece coordinate systems (standard workpiece coordinate systems) selectable with G54 to G59, 48 additional workpiece Adding Workpiece coordinate systems (additional workpiece coordinate systems) can be Coordinate Systems used. A
  • Page 154B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 7. COORDINATE SYSTEM (3) A custom macro allows a workpiece zero point offset value to be handled as a system variable. (4) Workpiece zero point offset data can be entered or output as external data. (5) The PMC window function enables workpiece zero point offset data to be r
  • Page 1557. COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 7.3 When a program is created in a workpiece coordinate system, a child workpiece coordinate system can be set for easier programming. Such a LOCAL COORDINATE child coordinate system is referred to as a local coordinate system. SYSTEM Format G52 IPIP _;
  • Page 156B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 7. COORDINATE SYSTEM WARNING 1 When an axis returns to the reference point by the manual reference point return function,the zero point of the local coordinate system of the axis matches that of the work coordinate system. The same is true when the following command is issue
  • Page 1577. COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 7.4 Select the planes for circular interpolation, cutter compensation, and drilling by G–code. PLANE SELECTION The following table lists G–codes and the planes selected by them. Explanations Table 7.4 Plane selected by G code Selected G code Xp Yp Zp pla
  • Page 1588. COORDINATE VALUE B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING AND DIMENSION 8 COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION This chapter contains the following topics. 8.1 ABSOLUTE AND INCREMENTAL PROGRAMMING (G90, G91) 8.2 POLAR COORDINATE COMMAND (G15, G16) 8.3 INCH/METRIC CONVERSION (G20, G21) 8.4 DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING 137
  • Page 1598. COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 8.1 There are two ways to command travels of the tool; the absolute command, and the incremental command. In the absolute command, ABSOLUTE AND coordinate value of the end position is programmed; in the incremental INCREMENTAL command, move
  • Page 1608. COORDINATE VALUE B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING AND DIMENSION 8.2 The end point coordinate value can be input in polar coordinates (radius and angle). POLAR COORDINATE The plus direction of the angle is counterclockwise of the selected plane COMMAND first axis + direction, and the minus direction is cl
  • Page 1618. COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Setting the current Specify the radius (the distance between the current position and the position as the origin of point) to be programmed with an incremental command. The current the polar coordinate position is set as the origin of the
  • Page 1628. COORDINATE VALUE B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING AND DIMENSION N5 G15 G80 ; Canceling the polar coordinate command Limitations D Specifying a radius in In the polar coordinate mode, specify a radius for circular interpolation the polar coordinate or helical cutting (G02, G03) with R. mode D Axes that ar
  • Page 1638. COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 8.3 Either inch or metric input can be selected by G code. INCH/METRIC CONVERSION (G20,G21) Format G20 ; Inch input G21 ; mm input This G code must be specified in an independent block before setting the coordinate system at the beginning of
  • Page 1648. COORDINATE VALUE B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING AND DIMENSION 8.4 Numerical values can be entered with a decimal point. A decimal point can be used when entering a distance, time, or speed. Decimal points can DECIMAL POINT be specified with the following addresses: PROGRAMMING X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, C
  • Page 1659. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 9 SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) The spindle speed can be controlled by specifying a value following address S. This chapter contains the following topics. 9.1 SPECIFYING THE SPINDLE SPEED WITH A CODE 9.2 SPECIFYING THE SPINDLE SPE
  • Page 1669. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING (S FUNCTION) 9.1 When a value is specified after address S, the code signal and strobe signal are sent to the machine to control the spindle rotation speed. SPECIFYING THE A block can contain only one S code. Refer to the appropriate manual SPINDLE
  • Page 1679. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 9.3 Specify the surface speed (relative speed between the tool and workpiece) following S. The spindle is rotated so that the surface speed is constant CONSTANT regardless of the position of the tool. SURFACE SPEED CONTROL (G96, G97) Fo
  • Page 1689. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING (S FUNCTION) Explanations D Constant surface speed G96 (constant surface speed control command) is a modal G code. After control command (G96) a G96 command is specified, the program enters the constant surface speed control mode (G96 mode) and spec
  • Page 1699. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Surface speed specified in the G96 mode G96 mode G97 mode Specify the surface speed in m/min (or feet/min) G97 command Store the surface speed in m/min (or feet/min) Specified Command for The specified the spindle spindle speed speed
  • Page 1709. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING (S FUNCTION) 9.4 With this function, an overheat alarm (No. 704) is raised when the spindle speed deviates from the specified speed due to machine conditions. SPINDLE SPEED This function is useful, for example, for preventing the seizure of the FLUC
  • Page 1719. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Explanations The fluctuation of the spindle speed is detected as follows: 1. When an alarm is issued after a specified spindle speed is reached Spindle speed r d q Specified q d speed r Actual speed Check No check Check Time Specificati
  • Page 1729. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING (S FUNCTION) NOTE 1 When an alarm is issued in automatic operation, a single block stop occurs. The spindle overheat alarm is indicated on the screen, and the alarm signal “SPAL” is output (set to 1 for the presence of an alarm). This signal is clea
  • Page 17310. TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 10 TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) General Two tool functions are available. One is the tool selection function, and the other is the tool life management function. 152
  • Page 17410. TOOL FUNCTION B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING (T FUNCTION) 10.1 By specifying an up to 8–digit numerical value following address T, tools can be selected on the machine. TOOL SELECTION One T code can be commanded in a block. Refer to the machine tool FUNCTION builder’s manual for the number of digits c
  • Page 17510. TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 10.2 Tools are classified into various groups, with the tool life (time or frequency of use) for each group being specified. The function of TOOL LIFE accumulating the tool life of each group in use and selecting and using MANAGEMENT the next t
  • Page 17610. TOOL FUNCTION B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING (T FUNCTION) 10.2.1 Tool life management data consists of tool group numbers, tool numbers, Tool Life Management codes specifying tool compensation values, and tool life value. Data Explanations D Tool group number The Max. number of groups and the number o
  • Page 17710. TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 10.2.2 In a program, tool life management data can be registered in the CNC unit, Register, Change and and registered tool life management data can be changed or deleted. Delete of Tool Life Management Data Explanations A different program form
  • Page 17810. TOOL FUNCTION B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING (T FUNCTION) Format D Register with deleting Format Meaning of command all groups G10L3 ; G10L3 :Register with deleting all groups PL ; P :Group number T HD ; L :Life value T HD ; T :Tool number H :Code specifying tool offset value (H code) PL ; D :Code spe
  • Page 17910. TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Setting a tool life cout Format Meaning of command type for groups G10L3 Q_ : Life count type (1:Frequency, 2:Time) or G10L3P1); PL Q ; T HD ; T H⋅ D ; ⋅ PL Q ; T HD ; T HD ; G11 ; M02 (M30) ; CAUTION S When the Q command is omitted, the valu
  • Page 18010. TOOL FUNCTION B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING (T FUNCTION) 10.2.3 Tool Life Management Command in a Machining Program Explanations D Command The following command is used for tool life management: Toooo; Specifies a tool group number. The tool life management function selects, from a specified group, a
  • Page 18110. TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Types For tool life management, the four tool change types indicated below are available. The type used varies from one machine to another. For details, refer to the appropriate manual of each machinde tool builder. Table 10.2.3 Tool Change T
  • Page 18210. TOOL FUNCTION B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING (T FUNCTION) D Tool change type B and C Suppose that the tool life management ignore number is 100. T101; A tool whose life has not expired is selected from group 1. (Suppose that tool number 010 is selected.) M06T102;Tool life counting is performed for the
  • Page 18310. TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 10.2.4 The life of a tool is specified by a usage frequency (count) or usage time Tool Life (in minutes). Explanations D Usage count The usage count is incremented by 1 for each tool used in a program. In other words, the usage count is increme
  • Page 184B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 11. AUXILIARY FUNCTION 11 AUXILIARY FUNCTION General There are two types of auxiliary functions ; miscellaneous function (M code) for specifying spindle start, spindle stop program end, and so on, and secondary auxiliary function (B code) for specifying index table positioni
  • Page 18511. AUXILIARY FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 11.1 When a numeral is specified following address M, code signal and a strobe signal are sent to the machine. The machine uses these signals to AUXILIARY turn on or off its functions. FUNCTION Usually, only one M code can be specified in one block. In
  • Page 186B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 11. AUXILIARY FUNCTION 11.2 In general, only one M code can be specified in a block. However, up to three M codes can be specified at once in a block by setting bit 7 (M3B) MULTIPLE M of parameter No. 3404 to 1. Up to three M codes specified in a block are COMMANDS IN A simu
  • Page 18711. AUXILIARY FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 11.3 The M code group check function checks if a combination of multiple M codes (up to three M codes) contained in a block is correct. M CODE GROUP This function has two purposes. One is to detect if any of the multiple M CHECK FUNCTION codes specifie
  • Page 188B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 11. AUXILIARY FUNCTION 11.4 Indexing of the table is performed by address B and a following 8–digit number. The relationship between B codes and the corresponding THE SECOND indexing differs between machine tool builders. AUXILIARY Refer to the manual issued by the machine t
  • Page 18912. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 12 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION General D Main program and There are two program types, main program and subprogram. Normally, subprogram the CNC operates according to the main program. However, when a command calling a subprogram is encountered in the mai
  • Page 190B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 12. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION D Program components A program consists of the following components: Table 12 Program components Components Descriptions Tape start Symbol indicating the start of a program file Leader section Used for the title of a program file, etc. Program start
  • Page 19112. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 12.1 This section describes program components other than program sections. See II–12.2 for a program section. PROGRAM COMPONENTS Leader section OTHER THAN Tape start % TITLE ; Program start PROGRAM O0001 ; SECTIONS Program section (COMMENT) Comment
  • Page 192B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 12. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION NOTE If one file contains multiple programs, the EOB code for label skip operation must not appear before a second or subsequent program number. D Comment section Any information enclosed by the control–out and control–in codes is regarded as a comm
  • Page 19312. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Tape end A tape end is to be placed at the end of a file containing NC programs. If programs are entered using the automatic programming system, the mark need not be entered. The mark is not displayed on the screen. However, when a file is output,
  • Page 194B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 12. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION 12.2 This section describes elements of a program section. See II–12.1 for program components other than program sections. PROGRAM SECTION CONFIGURATION % TITLE; Program number O0001 ; N1 … ; Sequence number (COMMENT) Comment section Program section
  • Page 19512. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Sequence number and A program consists of several commands. One command unit is called a block block. One block is separated from another with an EOB of end of block code. Table 12.2 (a) EOB code Name ISO code EIA code Notation in this manual End
  • Page 196B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 12. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION D Block configuration A block consists of one or more words. A word consists of an address (word and address) followed by a number some digits long. (The plus sign (+) or minus sign (–) may be prefixed to a number.) Word = Address + number (Example
  • Page 19712. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Major addresses and Major addresses and the ranges of values specified for the addresses are ranges of command shown below. Note that these figures represent limits on the CNC side, values which are totally different from limits on the machine too
  • Page 198B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 12. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION D Optional block skip When a slash followed by a number (/n (n=1 to 9)) is specified at the head of a block, and optional block skip switch n on the machine operator panel is set to on, the information contained in the block for which /n correspondi
  • Page 19912. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Program end The end of a program is indicated by programming one of the following codes at the end of the program: Table 12.2 (d) Code of a program end Code Meaning usage M02 For main program M30 M99 For subprogram If one of the program end codes
  • Page 200B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 12. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION 12.3 If a program contains a fixed sequence or frequently repeated pattern, such a sequence or pattern can be stored as a subprogram in memory to simplify SUBPROGRAM the program. (M98, M99) A subprogram can be called from the main program. A called
  • Page 20112. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 NOTE 1 The M98 and M99 code signal and strobe signal are not output to the machine tool. 2 If the subprogram number specified by address P cannot be found, an alarm (No. 078) is output. Examples l M98 P51002 ; This command specifies ”Call the subpro
  • Page 202B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 12. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION Special Usage D Specifying the sequence If P is used to specify a sequence number when a subprogram is number for the return terminated, control does not return to the block after the calling block, but destination in the main returns to the block w
  • Page 20312. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Using a subprogram only A subprogram can be executed just like a main program by searching for the start of the subprogram with the MDI. (See III–9.3 for information about search operation.) In this case, if a block containing M99 is executed, con
  • Page 204B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 12. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION 12.4 The 8–digit program number function enables specification of program numbers with eight digits following address O (O00000001 to 8–DIGIT PROGRAM O99999999). NUMBER Explanations D Disabling editing of Editing of subprograms O00008000 to O0000899
  • Page 20512. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 2) Macro call using M code Program number Parameter used to specify M code When SPR = 0 When SPR = 1 No.6080 O00009020 O90009020 No.6081 O00009021 O90009021 No.6082 O00009022 O90009022 No.6083 O00009023 O90009023 No.6084 O00009024 O90009024 No.6085
  • Page 206B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 12. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION 6) Pattern data function Program numaber When SPR = 0 When SPR = 1 O00009500 O90009500 O00009501 O90009501 O00009502 O90009502 O00009503 O90009503 O00009504 O90009504 O00009505 O90009505 O00009506 O90009506 O00009507 O90009507 O00009508 O90009508 O0
  • Page 20713. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 13 FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING General This chapter explains the following items: 13.1 CANNED CYCLE 13.2 RIGID TAPPING 13.3 CANNED GRINDING CYCLE (FOR GRINDING MACHINE) 13.4 GRINDING WHEEL WEAR COMPENSATION BY CONTINUOUS DRESSING (
  • Page 20813. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING 13.1 Canned cycles make it easier for the programmer to create programs. With a canned cycle, a frequently–used machining operation can be CANNED CYCLE specified in a single block with a G function; without canned cycles, normally more t
  • Page 20913. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Explanations A canned cycle consists of a sequence of six operations (Fig. 13.1 (a)) Operation 1 Positioning of axes X and Y (including also another axis) Operation 2 Rapid traverse up to point R level Operation 3 Hole machining Operatio
  • Page 21013. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING Examples Assume that the U, V and W axes be parallel to the X, Y, and Z axes respectively. This condition is specified by parameter No. 1022. G17 G81 ………Z _ _ : The Z axis is used for drilling. G17 G81 ………W _ _ : The W axis is used for d
  • Page 21113. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Return point level When the tool reaches the bottom of a hole, the tool may be returned to G98/G99 point R or to the initial level. These operations are specified with G98 and G99. The following illustrates how the tool moves when G98
  • Page 21213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING 13.1.1 This cycle performs high–speed peck drilling. It performs intermittent cutting feed to the bottom of a hole while removing chips from the hole. High–Speed Peck Drilling Cycle (G73) Format G73 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ Q_ F_ K_ ; X_ Y_ : Hole po
  • Page 21313. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Explanations The high–speed peck drilling cycle performs intermittent feeding along the Z–axis. When this cycle is used, chips can be removed from the hole easily, and a smaller value can be set for retraction. This allows, drilling to b
  • Page 21413. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING 13.1.2 This cycle performs left–handed tapping. In the left–handed tapping cycle, when the bottom of the hole has been reached, the spindle rotates Left–Handed Tapping clockwise. Cycle (G74) Format G74 X_ Y_ Z_ R_P_ F_ K_ ; X_ Y_ : Hole
  • Page 21513. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Limitations D Axis switching Before the drilling axis can be changed, the canned cycle must be canceled. D Drilling In a block that does not contain X, Y, Z, R, or any other axes, drilling is not performed. D R Specify R in blocks that p
  • Page 21613. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING 13.1.3 The fine boring cycle bores a hole precisely. When the bottom of the hole has been reached, the spindle stops, and the tool is moved away from the Fine Boring Cycle machined surface of the workpiece and retracted. (G76) Format G76
  • Page 21713. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Explanations When the bottom of the hole has been reached, the spindle is stopped at the fixed rotation position, and the tool is moved in the direction opposite to the tool tip and retracted. This ensures that the machined surface is no
  • Page 21813. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING 13.1.4 This cycle is used for normal drilling. Cutting feed is performed to the bottom of the hole. The tool is then retracted from the bottom of the hole Drilling Cycle, Spot in rapid traverse. Drilling (G81) Format G81 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ F_ K
  • Page 21913. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Restrictions D Axis switching Before the drilling axis can be changed, the canned cycle must be canceled. D Drilling In a block that does not contain X, Y, Z, R, or any other axes, drilling is not performed. D Cancel Do not specify a G c
  • Page 22013. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING 13.1.5 This cycle is used for normal drilling. Cutting feed is performed to the bottom of the hole. At the bottom, a dwell Drilling Cycle Counter is performed, then the tool is retracted in rapid traverse. Boring Cycle (G82) This cycle i
  • Page 22113. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Restrictions D Axis switching Before the drilling axis can be changed, the canned cycle must be canceled. D Drilling In a block that does not contain X, Y, Z, R, or any other axes, drilling is not performed. D P Specify P in blocks that
  • Page 22213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING 13.1.6 This cycle performs peck drilling. It performs intermittent cutting feed to the bottom of a hole while Peck Drilling Cycle removing shavings from the hole. (G83) Format G83 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ Q_ F_ K_ ; X_ Y_ : Hole position data Z_ : Th
  • Page 22313. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Limitations D Axis switching Before the drilling axis can be changed, the canned cycle must be canceled. D Drilling In a block that does not contain X, Y, Z, R, or any other axes, drilling is not performed. D Q Specify Q in blocks that p
  • Page 22413. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING 13.1.7 An arbor with the overload torque detection function is used to retract the Small–Hole Peck tool when the overload torque detection signal (skip signal) is detected during drilling. Drilling is resumed after the spindle speed and
  • Page 22513. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Explanations D Component operations of the cycle *Positioning along the X–axis and Y–axis *Positioning at point R along the Z–axis *Drilling along the Z–axis (first drilling, depth of cut Q, incremental) Retraction (bottom of the hole →
  • Page 22613. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING D Changing the drilling In a single G83 cycle, drilling conditions are changed for each drilling conditions operation (advance → drilling → retraction). Bits 1 and 2 of parameter OLS, NOL No. 5160 can be specified to suppress the change
  • Page 22713. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Specifying address I The forward or backward traveling speed can be specified with address I in the same format as address F, as shown below: G83 I1000 ; (without decimal point) G83 I1000. ; (with decimal point) Both commands indicate
  • Page 22813. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING Examples N01M03 S___ ; N02Mjj ; N03G83 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ Q_ F_ I_ K_ P_ ; N04X_ Y_ ; : : N10G80 ; N01: Specifies forward spindle rotation and spindle speed. N02: Specifies the M code to execute G83 as the small–hole
  • Page 22913. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Explanations Tapping is performed by rotating the spindle clockwise. When the bottom of the hole has been reached, the spindle is rotated in the reverse direction for retraction. This operation creates threads. Feedrate overrides are ign
  • Page 23013. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING 13.1.9 This cycle is used to bore a hole. Boring Cycle (G85) Format G85 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ F_ K_ ; X_ Y_ : Hole position data Z_ : The distance from point R to the bottom of the hole R_ : The distance from the initial level to point R level F_
  • Page 23113. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Limitations D Axis switching Before the drilling axis can be changed, the canned cycle must be canceled. D Drilling In a block that does not contain X, Y, Z, R, or any other axes, drilling is not performed. D Cancel Do not specify a G co
  • Page 23213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING 13.1.10 This cycle is used to bore a hole. Boring Cycle (G86) Format G86 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ F_ K_ ; X_ Y_ : Hole position data Z_ : The distance from point R to the bottom of the hole R_ : The distance from the initial level to point R level F_
  • Page 23313. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Limitations D Axis switching Before the drilling axis can be changed, the canned cycle must be canceled. D Drilling In a block that does not contain X, Y, Z, R, or any other axes, drilling is not performed. D Cancel Do not specify a G co
  • Page 23413. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING 13.1.11 This cycle performs accurate boring. Boring Cycle Back Boring Cycle (G87) Format G87 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ K_ ; X_ Y_ : Hole position data Z_ : The distance from the bottom of the hole to point Z R_ : The distance from the initial
  • Page 23513. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Explanations After positioning along the X– and Y–axes, the spindle is stopped at the fixed rotation position. The tool is moved in the direction opposite to the tool tip, positioning (rapid traverse) is performed to the bottom of the ho
  • Page 23613. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING 13.1.12 This cycle is used to bore a hole. Boring Cycle (G88) Format G88 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ F_ K_ ; X_ Y_ : Hole position data Z_ : The distance from point R to the bottom of the hole R_ : The distance from the initial level to point R level
  • Page 23713. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Limitations D Axis switching Before the drilling axis can be changed, the canned cycle must be canceled. D Drilling In a block that does not contain X, Y, Z, R, or any other axes, drilling is not performed. D P Specify P in blocks that p
  • Page 23813. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING 13.1.13 This cycle is used to bore a hole. Boring Cycle (G89) Format G89 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ F_ K_ ; X_ Y_ : Hole position data Z_ : The distance from point R to the bottom of the hole R_ : The distance from the initial level to point R level
  • Page 23913. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Limitations D Axis switching Before the drilling axis can be changed, the canned cycle must be canceled. D Drilling In a block that does not contain X, Y, Z, R, or any other axes, drilling is not performed. D P Specify P in blocks that p
  • Page 24013. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING 13.1.14 G80 cancels canned cycles. Canned Cycle Cancel (G80) Format G80 ; Explanations All canned cycles are canceled to perform normal operation. Point R and point Z are cleared. This means that R = 0 and Z = 0 in incremental mode. Othe
  • Page 24113. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Program example using tool length offset and canned cycles Reference position 350 #1 #11 #6 100 #7 #10 100 #2 #12 #5 100 Y #8 #9 200 100 #3 #13 #4 X 400 150 250 250 150 # 11 to 16 Drilling of a 10mm diameter hole # 17 to 10 Drilling of a
  • Page 24213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING Offset value +200.0 is set in offset No.11, +190.0 is set in offset No.15, and +150.0 is set in offset No.31 Program example ; N001 G92X0Y0Z0; Coordinate setting at reference position N002 G90 G00 Z250.0 T11 M6; Tool change N003 G43 Z0 H
  • Page 24313. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 13.2 The tapping cycle (G84) and left–handed tapping cycle (G74) may be performed in standard mode or rigid tapping mode. RIGID TAPPING In standard mode, the spindle is rotated and stopped along with a movement along the tapping axis usi
  • Page 24413. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING 13.2.1 When the spindle motor is controlled in rigid mode as if it were a servo motor, a tapping cycle can be sped up. Rigid Tapping (G84) Format G84 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ F_ K_ ; X_ Y_ : Hole position data Z_ : The distance from point R to the
  • Page 24513. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Thread lead In feed–per–minute mode, the thread lead is obtained from the expression, feedrate × spindle speed. In feed–per–revolution mode, the thread lead equals the feedrate speed. D Tool length If a tool length compensation (G43, G
  • Page 24613. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING Examples Z–axis feedrate 1000 mm/min Spindle speed 1000 rpm Thread lead 1.0 mm G94 ; Specify a feed–per–minute command. G00 X120.0 Y100.0 ; Positioning M29 S1000 ; Rigid mode specification G84 Z–100.0 R–2
  • Page 24713. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 13.2.2 When the spindle motor is controlled in rigid mode as if it were a servo motor, tapping cycles can be sped up. Left–Handed Rigid Tapping Cycle (G74) Format G74 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ F_ K_ ; X_ Y_ : Hole position data Z_ : The distance fr
  • Page 24813. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING D Thread lead In feed–per–minute mode, the thread lead is obtained from the expression, feedrate × spindle speed. In feed–per–revolution mode, the thread lead equals the feedrate. D Tool length If a tool length offset (G43, G44, or G49)
  • Page 24913. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Examples Z–axis feedrate 1000 mm/min Spindle speed 1000 rpm Thread lead 1.0 mm G94 ; Specify a feed–per–minute command. G00 X120.0 Y100.0 ; Positioning M29 S1000 ; Rigid mode specification G84 Z–100.0 R–
  • Page 25013. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING 13.2.3 Tapping a deep hole in rigid tapping mode may be difficult due to chips sticking to the tool or increased cutting resistance. In such cases, the peck Peck Rigid Tapping rigid tapping cycle is useful. Cycle (G84 or G74) In this cyc
  • Page 25113. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Explanations D High–speed peck After positioning along the X– and Y–axes, rapid traverse is performed tapping cycle to point R. From point R, cutting is performed with depth Q (depth of cut for each cutting feed), then the tool is retrac
  • Page 25213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING D Cancel Do not specify a group 01 G code (G00 to G03) and G73 in the same block. If they are specified together, G73 is canceled. D Tool offset In the canned cycle mode, tool offsets are ignored. 13.2.4 The rigid tapping canned cycle is
  • Page 25313. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 13.3 Canned grinding cycles make it easier for the programmer to create programs that include grinding. With a canned grinding cycle, repetitive Canned Grinding operation peculiar to grinding can be specified in a single block with a G C
  • Page 25413. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING 13.3.1 A plunge grinding cycle is performed. Plunge Grinding Cycle (G75) Format G75 I_ J_ K_ X(Z)_ R_ F_ P_ L_ ; I_: Depth–of–cut 1 (A sign in the command specifies the direction of cutting.) J_ : Depth–of–cut 2 (A sign in the command sp
  • Page 25513. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Limitations D X(Z), I, J, K X, (Z), I, J, and K must all be specified in incremental mode. D Clear I, J, X, and Z in canned cycles are modal data common to G75, G77, G78, and G79. They remain valid until new data is specified. They are c
  • Page 25613. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING 13.3.2 A direct constant–dimension plunge grinding cycle is performed. Direct Constant–Dimension Plunge Grinding Cycle (G77) Format G77 I_ J_ K_ X(Z)_ R_ F_ P_ L_ ; I_: Depth–of–cut 1 (A sign in the command specifies the direction of cut
  • Page 25713. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Skip signal When the cycle is performed using G77, a skip signal can be input to terminate the cycle. When a skip signal is input, the current operation sequence is interrupted or completed, then the cycle is terminated. The following
  • Page 25813. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING 13.3.3 A continuous–feed surface grinding cycle is performed. Continuous–Feed Surface Grinding Cycle (G78) Format G78 I_ (J_) K_ X_ F_ P_ L_ ; I_: Depth–of–cut 1 (A sign in the command specifies the direction of cutting.) J_ : Depth–of–c
  • Page 25913. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Restrictions D J When J is omitted, it is assumed to be 1. J is valid only in the block where it is specified. D I, J, K, X X, (Z), I, J, and K must all be specified in incremental mode. D Clear I, J, X, and Z in canned cycles are modal
  • Page 26013. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING 13.3.4 An intermittent–feed surface grinding cycle is performed. Intermittent–Feed Surface Grinding Cycle (G79) Format G79 I_ J_ K_ X_ R_ F_ P_ L_ ; I_: Depth–of–cut 1 (A sign in the command specifies the direction of cutting.) J_ : Dept
  • Page 26113. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Restrictions D X, I, J, K X, (Z), I, J, and K must all be specified in incremental mode. D Clear I, J, X, and Z in canned cycles are modal data common to G75, G77, G78, and G79. They remain valid until new data is specified. They are cle
  • Page 26213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING 13.4 This function enables continuous dressing. When G75, G77, G78, or G79 is specified, grinding wheel cutting and GRINDING–WHEEL dresser cutting are compensated continuously according to the amount of WEAR continuous dressing during gr
  • Page 26313. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 13.5 AUTOMATIC GRINDING WHEEL DIAMETER COMPENSATION AFTER DRESSING 13.5.1 Compensation amounts set in offset memory can be modified by using the external tool compensation function or programming (by changing Checking the Minimum offsets
  • Page 26413. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING 13.6 Every time an external signal is input, cutting is performed by a fixed amount according to the programmed profile in the specified Y–Z plane. IN–FEED GRINDING ALONG THE Y AND Z AXES AT THE END OF TABLE SWING (FOR GRINDING MACHINE)
  • Page 26513. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 13.7 Chamfering and corner rounding blocks can be inserted automatically between the following: OPTIONAL ANGLE ⋅Between linear interpolation and linear interpolation blocks CHAMFERING AND ⋅Between linear interpolation and circular interp
  • Page 26613. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING Examples N001 G92 G90 X0 Y0 ; N002 G00 X10.0 Y10.0 ; N003 G01 X50.0 F10.0 ,C5.0 ; N004 Y25.0 ,R8.0 ; N005 G03 X80.0 Y50.0 R30.0 ,R8.0 ; N006 G01 X50.0 ,R8.0 ; N007 Y70.0 ,C5.0 ; N008 X10.0 ,C5.0 ; N009 Y10.0 ; N010 G00 X0 Y0 ; N011 M0 ;
  • Page 26713. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Restrictions D Plane selection Chamfering and corner rounding can be performed only in the plane specified by plane selection (G17, G18, or G19). These functions cannot be performed for parallel axes. D Next block A block specifying cham
  • Page 26813. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING 13.8 Upon completion of positioning in each block in the program, an external operation function signal can be output to allow the machine to perform EXTERNAL MOTION specific operation. FUNCTION Concerning this operation, refer to the ma
  • Page 26913. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 13.9 Machining can be repeated after moving or rotating the figure using a subprogram. FIGURE COPY (G72.1, G72.2) Format D Rotational copy Xp–Yp plane (specified by G17) : G72.1 P_ L_ Xp_ Yp_ R_ ; Zp–Xp plane (specified by G18) : G72.1 P
  • Page 27013. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING (Example of a correct program) O1000 G00 G90 X100.0 Y200.0 ; ⋅⋅⋅⋅ ; ⋅⋅⋅⋅ ; M99 ; D Combination of The linear copy command can be specified in a subprogram for a rotational and linear rotational copy. Also, the rotational copy command can
  • Page 27113. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Y End point of the first copy P4 P5 D D P2 P1 D D D D D D P3 P6 P7 Start point of the second copy D X Start point P0 90 Main program O1000 ; N10 G92 X–20.0 Y0 ; N20 G00 G90 X0 Y0 ; N30 G01 G17 G41 X20. Y0 D01 F10 ; (P0) N40 Y20. ; (P1) N
  • Page 27213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING D Modes that must not be The figure cannot be copied during chamfering, corner rounding, or tool selected offset. D Unit system The two axes of the plane for copying a figure must have an identical unit system. D Single block Single–bloc
  • Page 27313. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Rotational copy Y (spot boring) P1 P0 Start point 60° X Main program O3000 ; N10 G92 G17 X80.0 Y50.0 ; (P0) N20 G72.1 P4000 L6 X0 Y0 R60.0 ; N30 G80 G00 X80.0 Y50.0 ; (P0) N40 M30 ; Subprogram O4000 N100 G90 G81 X_ Y_ R_ Z_ F_ ; (P1) N
  • Page 27413. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING D Linear copy Y P4 P5 P2 P7 Start point P P1 P3 6 X P0 70 70 70 P8 Main program O1000 ; N10 G92 X–20.0 Y0 ; N20 G00 G90 X0 Y0 ; N30 G01 G17 G41 X_ Y_ D01 F10 ; (P0) N40 Y_ ; (P1) N50 X_ ; (P2) N60 G72.2 P2000 L3 I70.0 J0 ; N70 X_ Y_ ; (P
  • Page 27513. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Combination of rotational Y copying and linear P0 copying (bolt hole circle) Start point P1 45° X Main program O1000 ; N10 G92 G17 X100.0 Y80.0 ; (P0) N20 G72.1 P2000 X0 Y0 L8 R45.0 ; N30 G80 G00 X100.0 Y80.0 ; (P0) N40 M30 ; Subprogra
  • Page 27613. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING 13.10 Coordinate conversion about an axis can be carried out if the center of rotation, direction of the axis of rotation, and angular displacement are THREE– specified. This function is very useful in three–dimensional machining DIMENSI
  • Page 27713. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 subsequent N3 block, coordinates in the X’’Y’’Z’’ coordinate system are specified with Xp, Yp, and Zp. The X’’Y’’Z’’ coordinate system is called the program coordinate system. If (Xp, Yp, Zp) is not specified in the N2 block, (Xp, Yp, Zp
  • Page 27813. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING D Equation for The following equation shows the general relationship between (x, y, z) three–dimensional in the program coordinate system and (X, Y, Z) in the original coordinate coordinate conversion system (workpiece coordinate system)
  • Page 27913. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Three basic axes and Three–dimensional coordinate conversion can be applied to a desired their parallel axes combination of three axes selected out of the basic three axes (X, Y, Z) and their parallel axes. The three–dimensional coordi
  • Page 28013. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING G53 Selecting the machine coordinate system G65 Custom macro calling G66 Continuous–state custom macro calling G67 Canceling continuous–state custom macro calling G73 Canned cycle (peck drilling cycle) G74 Canned cycle (reverse tapping c
  • Page 28113. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Limitations D manual intervention Three–dimensional coordinate conversion does not affect the degree of manual intervention or manual handle interrupt. D Positioning in the Three–dimensional coordinate conversion does not affect position
  • Page 28213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING Examples N1 G90 X0 Y0 Z0 ; Carries out positioning to zero point H. N2 G68 X10. Y0 Z0 I0 J1 K0 R30. ; Forms new coordinate system X’Y’Z’. N3 G68 X0 Y–10. Z0 I0 J0 K1 R–90. ; Forms other coordinate system X’’Y’’Z’’. The origin agrees with
  • Page 28313. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 13.11 By specifying indexing positions (angles) for the indexing axis (one rotation axis, A, B, or C), the index table of the machining center can be INDEX TABLE indexed. INDEXING FUNCTION Before and after indexing, the index table is au
  • Page 28413. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING 2. Using no miscellaneous functions By setting to bits 2, 3, and 4 of parameter ABS, INC,G90 No.5500, operation can be selected from the following two options. Select the operation by referring to the manual written by the machine tool b
  • Page 28513. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Indexing function and other functions Table 13.11 (a) Index indexing function and other functions Item Explanation This value is rounded down when bit 1 of parameter REL No. 5500 Relative position display specifies this option. This va
  • Page 286B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION 14 COMPENSATION FUNCTION General This chapter describes the following compensation functions: 14.1 TOOL LENGTH OFFSET (G43, G44, G49) 14.2 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (G37) 14.3 TOOL OFFSET (G45–G48) 14.4 CUTTER COMPENSATION B (G39–G42) 14.5 C
  • Page 28714. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 14.1 This function can be used by setting the difference between the tool length assumed during programming and the actual tool length of the tool used TOOL LENGTH into the offset memory. It is possible to compensate the difference without OFFSET ch
  • Page 288B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION Explanations D Selection of tool length Select tool length offset A, B, or C, by setting bits 0 and 1 of parameter offset TLC,TLB No. 5001. D Direction of the offset When G43 is specified, the tool length offset value (stored in offset memory) speci
  • Page 28914. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 (2) Cutter compensation C When the offset numbers for cutter compensation C are specified or modified, the offset number validation order varies, depending on the condition, as described below. D When OFH (bit 2 of parameter No. 5001) = 0 O××××; H01
  • Page 290B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION NOTE The tool length offset value corresponding to offset No. 0, that is, H0 always means 0. It is impossible to set any other tool length offset value to H0. D Performing tool length Tool length offset B can be executed along two or more axes when
  • Page 29114. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Examples Tool length offset (in boring holes No.1, 2, and 3) t1 t3 20 30 (6) +Y (13) (9) (1) t2 30 +X 120 30 50 +Z Actual position (2) Programmed 35 3 (12) position (3) (5) (10) 18 (7) (8) 22 offset 30 value (4) (11) ε=4mm 8 ⋅Program H1=–4.0 (Tool l
  • Page 292B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION 14.1.2 This section describes the tool length offset cancellation and restoration G53, G28, G30, and performed when G53, G28, G30, or G31 is specified in tool length offset mode. Also described is the timing of tool length offset. G30.1 Commands in
  • Page 29314. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 NOTE When tool length offset is applied to multiple axes, all specified axes involved in reference position return are subject to cancellation. When tool length offset cancellation is specified at the same time, tool length offset vector cancellatio
  • Page 294B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION In tool length offset mode Type EVO (bit 6 of pa- Restoration block rameter No. 5001) 1 Block containing a G43/G44 block A/B 0 Block containing an H command and G43/44 command Ignored Block containing a C G43P_H_/G44P_H_ command WARNING When tool le
  • Page 29514. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 14.2 By issuing G37 the tool starts moving to the measurement position and keeps on moving till the approach end signal from the measurement AUTOMATIC TOOL device is output. Movement of the tool is stopped when the tool tip LENGTH reaches the measur
  • Page 296B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION D Changing the offset The difference between the coordinates of the position at which the tool value reaches for measurement and the coordinates specified by G37 is added to the current tool length offset value. Offset value = (Current compensation
  • Page 29714. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 WARNING When a manual movement is inserted into a movement at a measurement federate, return the tool to the!position before the inserted manual movement for restart. NOTE 1 When an H code is specified in the same block as G37, an alarm is generated
  • Page 298B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION Examples G92 Z760.0 X1100.0 ; Sets a workpiece coordinate system with respect to the programmed absolute zero point. G00 G90 X850.0 ; Moves the tool to X850.0. That is the tool is moved to a position that is a specified distance from the measurement
  • Page 29914. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 14.3 The programmed travel distance of the tool can be increased or decreased by a specified tool offset value or by twice the offset value. TOOL OFFSET The tool offset function can also be applied to an additional (G45–G48) axis. Workpiece ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ
  • Page 300B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION Explanations D Increase and decrease As shown in Table 14.3(a), the travel distance of the tool is increased or decreased by the specified tool offset value. In the absolute mode, the travel distance is increased or decreased as the tool is moved fr
  • Page 30114. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 WARNING 1 When G45 to G48 is specified to n axes (n=1–6) simultaneously in a motion block, offset is applied to all n axes. When the cutter is offset only for cutter radius or diameter in taper cutting, overcutting or undercutting occurs. Therefore,
  • Page 302B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION NOTE 1 When the specified direction is reversed by decrease as shown in the figure below, the tool moves in the opposite direction. Movement of the tool Program command Start Example position End G46 X2.50 ; position Tool offset value Equivalent com
  • Page 30314. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Examples Program using tool offset N12 N11 30R N9 40 N10 N13 N8 N4 30R 40 N3 N5 N1 N2 N6 N7 ÇÇÇ 50 ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ N14 80 50 40 30 30 Origin Y axis Tool diameter : 20φ Offset No. : 01 Tool offset value : +10.0 X axis Program N1 G91 G46 G00 X80.0 Y50.0 D01 ;
  • Page 304B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION 14.4 When the tool is moved, the tool path can be shifted by the radius of the tool (Fig. 14.4). CUTTER To make an offset as large as the radius of the tool, first create an offset COMPENSATION B vector with a length equal to the radius of the tool
  • Page 30514. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Format D Start up G00 (or G01) G41 (or G42) IP_ I R_ H_ ; (Cutter compensation start) G41 : Cutter compensation left (Group 07) : Cutter compensation right (Group 07) G42 IP_ : Command for axis movement I R_ : Incremental value from the end position
  • Page 306B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION D Offset plane selection Cutter compensation is carried out in the plane determined by G17, G18 and offset vector and G19 (G codes for plane selection.). This plane is called the offset plane. If the offset plane is not specified, G17 is assumed to
  • Page 30714. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 14.4.1 G41 offsets the tool towards the left of the workpiece as you see when you Cutter Compensation face in the same direction as the movement of the cutting tool. Left (G41) Explanations D G00 (positioning) or G41 X_ Y_ I_ J_ H_ ; G01 (linear int
  • Page 308B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION D G02, G03 G41… ; (Circular interpolation) : G02 (or G03) X_ Y_ R_ ; Above command specifies a new vector to be created to the left looking toward the direction in which an arc advances on a line connecting the arc center and the arc end point, and
  • Page 30914. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 14.4.2 G42, contrary to G41, specifies a tool to be offset to the right of work piece Cutter Compensation looking toward the direction in which the tool advances. G42 has the same function as G41, except that the directions of the vectors Right (G42
  • Page 310B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION D G02 or G03 G42… ; (Circular interpolation) : G02 (or G03) X_ Y_ R_; ÇÇÇÇ (X, Y) ÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇ Programmed path New vector ÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇ Tool center path ÇÇÇÇÇ R ÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇ Start position ÇÇÇÇÇ Old vector ÇÇÇÇÇ New vector ÇÇÇÇÇ (X, Y) R ÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇ Progra
  • Page 31114. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 14.4.3 When the following command is specified in the G01, G02, or G03 mode, Corner Offset Circular corner offset circular interpolation can be executed with respect to the radius of the tool. Interpolation (G39) Format In offset mode X_Y_ G39 X_Z_
  • Page 312B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION 14.4.4 When the following command is specified in the G00 or G01 mode, the Cutter Compensation tool moves from the head of the old vector at the start position to the end position (X, Y). In the G01 mode, the tool moves linearly. In the G00 Cancel (
  • Page 31314. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 14.4.5 The offset direction is switched from left to right, or from right to left Switch between generally through the offset cancel mode, but can be switched not through it only in positioning (G00) or linear interpolation (G01). In this case, the
  • Page 314B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION 14.4.6 The offset amount is changed generally when the tool is changed in the Change of the Cutter offset cancel mode, but can be changed in the offset mode only in positioning (G00) or linear interpolation (G01). Compensation Value Program as descr
  • Page 31514. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 14.4.7 If the tool compensation value is made negative (–), it is equal that G41 Positive/Negative and G42 are replaced with each other in the process sheet. Consequently, if the tool center is passing around the outside of the workbench it will Cut
  • Page 316B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION Examples N6 N5 20.0 N7 N4 40.0 R1=40.0 40.0 N3 R2=20.0 20.0 N2 N8 N10 N9 20.0 ÇÇ N1 ÇÇ Y axis N11 ÇÇ 20.0 X axis Unit : mm N1 G91 G17 G00 G41 X20.0 Y20.0 H08 ; N2 G01 Z–25.0 F100 ; N3 Y40.0 F250 ; N4 G39 I40.0 J20.0 ; N5 X40.0 Y20.0 ; N6 G39 I40.0 ;
  • Page 31714. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 14.5 When the tool is moved, the tool path can be shifted by the radius of the tool (Fig. 14.5 (a)). OVERVIEW OF To make an offset as large as the radius of the tool, CNC first creates an CUTTER offset vector with a length equal to the radius of the
  • Page 318B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION Format D Start up G00(or G01)G41(or G42) IP P_ D_ ; (Tool compensation start) G41 : Cutter compensation left (Group07) G42 : Cutter compensation right (Group07) IPP_ : Command for axis movement D_ : Code for specifying as the cutter compensation val
  • Page 31914. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Offset mode cancel In the offset mode, when a block which satisfies any one of the following conditions is executed, the CNC enters the offset cancel mode, and the action of this block is called the offset cancel. 1. G40 has been commanded. 2. 0 h
  • Page 320B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION D Positive/negative cutter If the offset amount is negative (–), distribution is made for a figure in compensation value and which G41’s and G42’s are all replaced with each other on the program. tool center path Consequently, if the tool center is
  • Page 32114. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Plane selection and Offset calculation is carried out in the plane determined by G17, G18 and vector G19, (G codes for plane selection). This plane is called the offset plane. Compensation is not executed for the coordinate of a position which is
  • Page 322B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION Examples N5 250R C1(700,1300) C3 (–150,1150) P4(500,1150) P5(900,1150) C2 (1550,1550) 650R 650R N4 N6 N3 N7 P3(450,900) P2 P6(950,900) P7 (250,900) (1150,900) N8 N2 P9(700,650) P1 P8 (250,550) (1150,550) N10 N9 N1 Y axis ÇÇÇ N11 ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ Start positi
  • Page 32314. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 14.6 This section provides a detailed explanation of the movement of the tool for cutter compensation C outlined in Section 14.5. DETAILS OF CUTTER This section consists of the following subsections: COMPENSATION C 14.6.1 General 14.6.2 Tool Movemen
  • Page 324B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION 14.6.2 When the offset cancel mode is changed to offset mode, the tool moves Tool Movement in as illustrated below (start–up): Start–up Explanations D Tool movement around an inner side of a corner Linear→Linear (180°xα) α Workpiece Programmed path
  • Page 32514. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Tool movement around Tool path in start–up has two types A and B, and they are selected by the outside of a corner at parameter SUP (No. 5003#0). an obtuse angle (90°xα<180°) Linear→Linear Start position G42 α Workpiece L Programmed path r S L Too
  • Page 326B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION D Tool movement around Tool path in start–up has two types A and B, and they are selected by the outside of an acute parameter SUP (No.5003#0). angle (α<90°) Linear→Linear Start position G42 L Workpiece α Programmed path r S L Tool center path Type
  • Page 32714. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D A block without tool If the command is specified at start–up, the offset vector is not created. movement specified at start–up G91 G40 … ; : N6 X100.0 Y100.0 ; N7 G41 X0 ; N8 Y–100.0 ; N9 Y–100.0 X100.0 ; SS N7 N6 N8 S r Tool center path N9 Progra
  • Page 328B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION 14.6.3 In the offset mode, the tool moves as illustrated below: Tool Movement in Offset Mode Explanations D Tool movement around the inside of a corner Linear→Linear (180°xα) α Workpiece Programmed path S L Tool center path Intersection L Linear→Cir
  • Page 32914. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Tool movement around the inside (α<1°) with an Intersection abnormally long vector, linear → linear r Tool center path Programmed path r r S Intersection Also in case of arc to straight line, straight line to arc and arc to arc, the reader should
  • Page 330B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION D Tool movement around the outside corner at an Linear→Linear obtuse angle (90°xα<180°) α Workpiece L Programmed path S Intersection L Tool center path Linear→Circular α L r Work- piece S L C Intersection Tool center path Programmed path Circular→Li
  • Page 33114. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Tool movement around the outside corner at an acute angle Linear→Linear (α<90°) L Workpiece r α L Programmed path S r L Tool center path L L Linear→Circular L r α L S r Work- L piece L C Tool center path Programmed path Circular→Linear C S α Workp
  • Page 332B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION D When it is exceptional End position for the arc is not If the end of a line leading to an arc is programmed as the end of the arc on the arc by mistake as illustrated below, the system assumes that cutter compensation has been executed with respec
  • Page 33314. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 The center of the arc is identiĆ If the center of the arc is identical with the start position or end point, P/S cal with the start position or alarm (No. 038) is displayed, and the tool will stop at the end position of the end position the precedin
  • Page 334B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION Tool center path with an inter- section Linear→Linear S Workpiece G42 L r r Programmed path L G41 Tool center path Workpiece Linear→Circular C Workpiece r G41 G42 Programmed path r Workpiece Tool center path L S Circular→Linear Workpiece G42 Program
  • Page 33514. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Tool center path without an in- When changing the offset direction in block A to block B using G41 and tersection G42, if intersection with the offset path is not required, the vector normal to block B is created at the start point of block B. Linea
  • Page 336B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION The length of tool center path Normally there is almost no possibility of generating this situation. larger than the circumference However, when G41 and G42 are changed, or when a G40 was of a circle commanded with address I, J, and K this situation
  • Page 33714. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Temporary cutter If the following command is specified in the offset mode, the offset mode compensation cancel is temporarily canceled then automatically restored. The offset mode can be canceled and started as described in II–15.6.2 and 15.6.4. S
  • Page 338B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION D Cutter compensation G The offset vector can be set to form a right angle to the moving direction code in the offset mode in the previous block, irrespective of machining inner or outer side, by commanding the cutter compensation G code (G41, G42)
  • Page 33914. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D A block without tool The following blocks have no tool movement. In these blocks, the tool movement will not move even if cutter compensation is effected. M05 ; . M code output S21 ; . S code output G04 X10.0 ; Dwell Commands (1) G10 L11 P01 R10.0
  • Page 340B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION D Corner movement When two or more vectors are produced at the end of a block, the tool moves linearly from one vector to another. This movement is called the corner movement. If these vectors almost coincide with each other, the corner movement isn
  • Page 34114. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 N4 G41 G91 G01 X150.0 P2 P3 P4 P5 Y200.‘0 ; N5 X150.0 Y200.0 ; N6 G02 J–600.0 ; N7 G01 X150.0 Y–200.0 ; P1 P6 N8 G40 X150.0 Y–200.0 ; N5 N7 N4 N8 Programmed path Tool center path N6 If the vector is not ignored, the tool path is as follows: P1 → P2
  • Page 342B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION 14.6.4 Tool Movement in Offset Mode Cancel Explanations D Tool movement around an inside corner Linear→Linear (180°xα) Workpiece α Programmed path r G40 Tool center path L S L Circular→Linear α r G40 Work- piece S C L Programmed path Tool center pat
  • Page 34314. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Tool movement around Tool path has two types, A and B; and they are selected by parameter SUP an outside corner at an (No. 5003#0). obtuse angle (90°xα<180°) Linear→Linear G40 α Workpiece Programmed path L r Tool center path L S Type A Circular→Li
  • Page 344B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION D Tool movement around Tool path has two types, A and B : and they are selected by parameter SUP an outside corner at an (No. 5003#0) acute angle (α<90°) Linear→Linear G40 Workpiece L α Programmed path G42 r Tool center path L S Type A Circular→Line
  • Page 34514. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Tool movement around the outside linear→linear S Tool center path at an acute angle less L than 1 degree (α<1°) r L (G42) Programmed path 1°or less G40 Start position D A block without tool When a block without tool movement is commanded together
  • Page 346B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION D Block containing G40 and I_J_K_ The previous block contains If a G41 or G42 block precedes a block in which G40 and I_, J_, K_ are G41 or G42 specified, the system assumes that the path is programmed as a path from the end position determined by t
  • Page 34714. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 The length of the tool center In the example shown below, the tool does not trace the circle more than path larger than the circumfer- once. It moves along the arc from P1 to P2. The interference check ence of a circle function described in II–15.6.
  • Page 348B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION 14.6.5 Tool overcutting is called interference. The interference check function Interference Check checks for tool overcutting in advance. However, all interference cannot be checked by this function. The interference check is performed even if over
  • Page 34914. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 (2) In addition to the condition (1), the angle between the start point and end point on the tool center path is quite different from that between the start point and end point on the programmed path in circular machining(more than 180 degrees). r2
  • Page 350B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION D Correction of (1) Removal of the vector causing the interference interference in advance When cutter compensation is performed for blocks A, B and C and vectors V1, V2, V3 and V4 between blocks A and B, and V5, V6, V7 and V8 between B and C are pr
  • Page 35114. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 (Example 2) The tool moves linearly from V1, V2, V7, to V8 V2 V7 V1 V8 Tool center path C V6 V3 C r r A C V5 V4 Programmed path B V4, V5 : Interference V3, V6 : Interference O1 O2 V2, V7 : No Interference (2) If the interference occurs after correct
  • Page 352B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION D When interference is assumed although actual interference does not (1) Depression which is smaller than the cutter compensation value occur Programmed path Tool center path Stopped A C B There is no actual interference, but since the direction pro
  • Page 35314. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 14.6.6 Overcutting by Cutter Compensation Explanations D Machining an inside When the radius of a corner is smaller than the cutter radius, because the corner at a radius inner offsetting of the cutter will result in overcuttings, an alarm is smalle
  • Page 354B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION D Machining a step smaller When machining of the step is commanded by circular machining in the than the tool radius case of a program containing a step smaller than the tool radius, the path of the center of tool with the ordinary offset becomes re
  • Page 35514. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 The above example should be modified as follows: N1 G91 G00 G41 X500.0 Y500.0 D1 ; N3 G01 Z–250.0 ; N5 G01 Z–50.0 F100 ; N6 Y1000.0 F200 ; Workpiece ÊÊÊÊÊ After compensation N6 ÊÊÊÊÊ ÊÊÊÊÊ ÊÊÊÊÊ ÊÊÊÊÊ N3, N5:Move command for the Z axis (500, 500) N1
  • Page 356B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION 14.6.7 Cutter compensation C is not performed for commands input from the Input Command from MDI. However, when automatic operation using the absolute commands is MDI temporarily stopped by the single block function, MDI operation is performed, then
  • Page 35714. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 14.6.8 A function has been added which performs positioning by automatically G53, G28, G30, G30.1 canceling a cutter compensation vector when G53 is specified in cutter compensation C mode, then automatically restoring that cutter and G29 Commands i
  • Page 358B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION (1) G53 specified in offset mode When CCN (bit 2 of parameter No.5003)=0 Oxxxx; [Type A] Start–up G90G41_ _; r r G53X_Y_; (G41G00) s s G00 G53 G00 s [Type B] Start–up r r s s G00 G53 G00 s When CCN (bit 2 of parameter No.5003)=1 [FS15 Type] r (G41G0
  • Page 35914. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 When CCN (bit2 of parameter No.5003)=1 [FS15 Type] r s G00 (G91G41G00) s G53 G90G00 (3) G53 specified in offset mode with no movement specified When CCN (bit2 of parameter No.5003)=0 Oxxxx; [Type A] G90G41_ _; r Start–up s G00 G00X20.Y20. ; G00 r G5
  • Page 360B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION WARNING 1 When cutter compensation C mode is set and all–axis machine lock is applied, the G53 command does not perform positioning along the axes to which machine lock is applied. The vector, however, is preserved. When CCN (bit 2 of parameter No.
  • Page 36114. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 NOTE 1 When a G53 command specifies an axis that is not in the cutter compensation C plane, a perpendicular vector is generated at the end point of the previous block, and the tool does not move. In the next block, offset mode is automatically resum
  • Page 362B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION D G28, G30, or G30.1 When G28, G30, or G30.1 is specified in cutter compensation C mode, command in cutter an operation of FS15 type is performed if CCN (bit 2 of parameter No. compensation C mode 5003) is set to 1. This means that an intersection v
  • Page 36314. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 (b) For return by G00 When CCN (bit 2 of parameter No. 5003) = 0 Oxxxx; [Type A] G91G41_ _ _; Intermediateposition G28/30/30.1 s s s G01 G28X40.Y0 ; r r G00 (G42G01) s Reference position or floating reference position [Type B] Intermediateposition G
  • Page 364B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION When CCN (bit 2 of parameter No. 5003) = 1 [FS15 Type] Intermediate position = return position (G42G01) s G01 s r G01 G28/30/30.1 G29 Reference position or floating reference position s (b) For return by G00 When CCN (bit 2 of parameter No.5003)=0 O
  • Page 36514. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 (3) G28, G30, or G30.1, specified in offset mode (with movement to a reference position not performed) (a) For return by G29 When CCN (bit 2 of parameter No.5003)=0 Oxxxx; [Type A] G91G41_ _ _; Return position (G42G01) s s G01 r G28/30/30.1 r G28X40
  • Page 366B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION (4) G28, G30, or G30.1 specified in offset mode (with no movement performed) (a) For return by G29 When CCN (bit 2 of parameter No.5003)=0 O××××; G91G41_ _ _; [Type A] G28/30/30.1/G29 Intersection vector G28X0Y0; (G41G01) r G29X0Y0; s G01 G01 Refere
  • Page 36714. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 When CCN (bit 2 of parameter No.5003)=1 [FS15 Type] G28/30/30.1 (G41G01) r s G00 Reference position or floating G01 reference position =Intermediateposition WARNING 1 When a G28, G30, or G30.1 command is specified during all–axis machine lock, a per
  • Page 368B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION NOTE 1 When a G28, G30, or G30.1 command specifies an axis that is not in the cutter compensation C plane, a perpendicular vector is generated at the end point of the previous block, and the tool does not move. In the next block, offset mode is auto
  • Page 36914. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D G29 command in cutter When G29 is specified in cutter compensation C mode, an operation of compensation C mode FS15 type is performed if CCN (bit 2 of parameter No. 5003) is set to 1. This means that an intersection vector is generated in the prev
  • Page 370B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION (b) For specification made other than immediately after automatic reference position return When CCN (bit 2 of parameter No.5003)=0 O××××; G91G41_ _ _; [Type A] Return position s G01 (G42G01) G29X40.Y40.; Intermediate r position s G29 s Start–up r [
  • Page 37114. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 When CCN (bit 2 of parameter No.5003)=1 [FS15 Type] Return position (G42G01) s s G01 G28/30/30.1 G29 s Reference position or floating r referenceposition=Intermedi- ate position (b) For specification made other than immediately after automatic refer
  • Page 372B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION (3) G29 specified in offset mode (with movement to a reference position not performed) (a) For specification made immediately after automatic reference position return When CCN (bit 2 of parameter No.5003)=0 O××××; G91G41_ _ _; [Type A] Intermediate
  • Page 37314. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 (b) For specification made other than immediately after automatic reference position return O××××; G91G41_ _ _; [Type A] (G42G01) s s G01 G29X0Y0; r G29 G01 s Intermediateposition =Return position [Type B] (G42G01) s s G01 G29 G01 s Intermediateposi
  • Page 374B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION (4) G29 specified in offset mode (with movement to an intermediate position and reference position not performed) (a) For specification made immediately after automatic reference position return When CCN (bit 2 of parameter No.5003)=0 O××××; G91G41_
  • Page 37514. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 (b) For specification made other than immediately after automatic reference position return When CCN (bit 2 of parameter No.5003)=0 O××××; G91G41_ _ _; [Type A] G29 s G29X0Y0; G01 (G41G01) r G01 s Intermediate position=return position [Type B] G29 s
  • Page 376B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION 14.6.9 By specifying G39 in offset mode during cutter compensation C, corner Corner Circular circular interpolation can be performed. The radius of the corner circular interpolation equals the compensation value. Interpolation (G39) Format In offset
  • Page 37714. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Examples D G39 without I, J, or K . . X axis . . (In offset mode) N1 Y10.0 ; N2 G39 ; Y axis N3 X-10.0 ; . . . . Block N1 Offset vector Block N2 (0.0, 10.0) Block N3 Programmed path Tool center path (-10.0, 10.0) D G39 with I, J, and K . . X axis .
  • Page 378B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION 14.7 In cutter compensation C, two–dimensional offsetting is performed for a selected plane. In three–dimensional tool compensation, the tool can be THREE– shifted three–dimensionally when a three–dimensional offset direction is DIMENSIONAL TOOL pro
  • Page 37914. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Explanations D Three–dimensional tool In three–dimensional tool compensation mode, the following three compensation vector –dimensional compensation vector is generated at the end of each block: Programmed path Path after three–dimensional tool comp
  • Page 380B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION D Specifying I, J, and K Addresses I, J, and K must all be specified to start three–dimensional tool compensation. When even one of the three addresses is omitted, two–dimensional cutter compensation C is activated. When a block specified in three–d
  • Page 38114. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Commands that clear the When one of the following G codes is specified in three–dimensional tool vector compensation mode, the vector is cleared: G73 Peck drilling cycle G74 Reverse tapping cycle G76 Fine boring G80 Canned cycle cancel G81 Drill c
  • Page 382B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION 14.8 Tool compensation values include tool geometry compensation values and tool wear compensation (Fig. 14.8 (a)). TOOL COMPENSATION VALUES, NUMBER ÇÇ Reference position OF COMPENSATION VALUES, AND ÇÇ OFSG ÇÇ ÇÇ ENTERING VALUES FROM THE OFSW OFSG:G
  • Page 38314. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Tool compensation Tool compensation memory A, B, or C can be used. memory and the tool The tool compensation memory determines the tool compensation values compensation value to that are entered (set) (Table 14.8 (b)). be entered Table 14.8 (b) Se
  • Page 384B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION 14.9 A programmed figure can be magnified or reduced (scaling). The dimensions specified with X_, Y_, and Z_ can each be scaled up or SCALING down with the same or different rates of magnification. (G50, G51) The magnification rate can be specified
  • Page 38514. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Explanations D Scaling up or down Least input increment of scaling magnification is: 0.001 or 0.00001 It is along all axes at the depended on parameter SCR (No. 5400#7) which value is selected. Then, same rate of set parameter SCLx (No.5401#0) to en
  • Page 386B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION D Scaling of circular Even if different magnifications are applie to each axis in circular interpolation interpolation, the tool will not trace an ellipse. When different magnifications are applied to axes and a circular interpolation is specified w
  • Page 38714. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Tool compensation This scaling is not applicable to cutter compensation values, tool length offset values, and tool offset values (Fig. 14.9 (e) ). Programmed figure Scaled figure Cutter compensation values are not scaled. Fig. 14.9 (e) Scaling du
  • Page 388B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION NOTE 1 The position display represents the coordinate value after scaling. 2 When a mirror image was applied to one axis of the specified plane, the following!results: (1)Circular command Direction of rotation is reversed. (2)Cutter compensation C .
  • Page 38914. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 14.10 A programmed shape can be rotated. By using this function it becomes possible, for example, to modify a program using a rotation command COORDINATE when a workpiece has been placed with some angle rotated from the SYSTEM ROTATION programmed po
  • Page 390B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION X Angle of rotation R (incremental value) Center of Angle of rotation (absolute value) rotation (α, β) Z Fig. 14.10 (b) Coordinate system rotation NOTE When a decimal fraction is used to specify angular displacement (R_), the 1’s digit corresponds t
  • Page 39114. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Limitations D Commands related to In coordinate system rotation mode, G codes related to reference position reference position return return (G27, G28, G29, G30, etc.) and those for changing the coordinate and the coordinate system (G52 to G59, G92,
  • Page 392B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION Examples D Cutter compensation C and coordinate system rotation It is possible to specify G68 and G69 in cutter compensation C mode. The rotation plane must coincide with the plane of cutter compensa- tion C. N1 G92 X0 Y0 G69 G01 ; N2 G42 G90 X1000
  • Page 39314. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 2. When the system is in cutter compensation model C, specify the commands in the following order (Fig.14.10(e)) : (cutter compensation C cancel) G51 ; scaling mode start G68 ; coordinate system rotation start : G41 ; cutter compensation C mode star
  • Page 394B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION D Repetitive commands for It is possible to store one program as a subprogram and recall subprogram coordinate system by changing the angle. rotation Sample program for when the RIN bit (bit 0 of parameter 5400) is set to 1. The specified angular di
  • Page 39514. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 14.11 When a tool with a rotation axis (C–axis) is moved in the XY plane during cutting, the normal direction control function can control the tool so that NORMAL DIRECTION the C–axis is always perpendicular to the tool path (Fig. 14.11 (a)). CONTRO
  • Page 396B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION Cutter center path Cutter center path Programmed path Center of the arc Programmed path Fig. 14.11 (b) Normal direction control left (G41.1) Fig. 14.11 (c) Normal direction control right (G42.1) Explanations D Angle of the C axis When viewed from th
  • Page 39714. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Cutter center path S N1 S : Single block stop point Programmed path N2 S N3 S Fig. 14.11 (e) Point at which a Single–Block Stop Occurs in the Normal Direction Control Mode Before circular interpolation is started, the C–axis is rotated so that the C
  • Page 398B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION D C axis feedrate Movement of the tool inserted at the beginning of each block is executed at the feedrate set in parameter 5481. If dry run mode is on at that time, the dry run feedrate is applied. If the tool is to be moved along the X–and Y–axes
  • Page 39914. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Movement for which arc Specify the maximum distance for which machining is performed with insertion is ignored the same normal direction as that of the preceding block. D Linear movement When distance N2, shown below, is smaller than the set value
  • Page 400B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION 14.12 A mirror image of a programmed command can be produced with respect to a programmed axis of symmetry (Fig. 14.12 (a)). PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE Y Axis of symmetry (X=50) (G50.1, G51.1) (2) (1) 100 60 Axis of symmetry 50 (Y=50) 40 0 (3) (4) 0
  • Page 40114. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Explanations D Mirror image by setting If the programmable mirror image function is specified when the command for producing a mirror image is also selected by a CNC external switch or CNC setting (see III–4.7), the programmable mirror image functio
  • Page 402B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION 14.13 The grinding wheel compensation function creates a compensation vector by extending the line between the specified compensation center and the GRINDING WHEEL specified end point, on the specified compensation plane. WEAR COMPENSATION Compensat
  • Page 40314. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Compensation vector A compensation vector is created by extending the line between the compensation center and the specified end point. The length of the compensation vector equals to the offset value corresponding to the offset number specified w
  • Page 404B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION D Circular and helical Grinding wheel wear compensation can also be applied to circular interpolation interpolation and helical interpolation. If the radius at the start point differs from that at the end point, the figure does not become an arc; it
  • Page 40514. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 (Example 1) When the compensation axes are the Y– and Z–axes and linear interpolation is performed for the X– and Y–axes Programmed path: a → b, compensated path: a’ → b’ + a’ Vay + Vay a’ Y Y Vb a a Va Vaz b’ Compensation Vby center Vby b’ b b Vbz
  • Page 406B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO 15 CUSTOM MACRO Although subprograms are useful for repeating the same operation, the custom macro function also allows use of variables, arithmetic and logic operations, and conditional branches for easy development of general programs such as pocketing and
  • Page 40715. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 15.1 An ordinary machining program specifies a G code and the travel distance directly with a numeric value; examples are G100 and X100.0. VARIABLES With a custom macro, numeric values can be specified directly or using a variable number. When a variable num
  • Page 408B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO D Range of variable values Local and common variables can have value 0 or a value in the following ranges : –1047 to –10–29 10–29 to 1047 If the result of calculation turns out to be invalid, an P/S alarm No. 111 is issued. D Omission of the decimal When a v
  • Page 40915. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 (b) Operation < vacant > is the same as 0 except when replaced by < vacant> When #1 = < vacant > When #1 = 0 #2 = #1 #2 = #1 # # #2 = < vacant > #2 = 0 #2 = #1*5 #2 = #1*5 # # #2 = 0 #2 = 0 #2 = #1+#1 #2 = #1 + #1 # # #2 = 0 #2 = 0 (c) Conditional expression
  • Page 410B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO Limitations Program numbers, sequence numbers, and optional block skip numbers cannot be referenced using variables. Example: Variables cannot be used in the following ways: O#1; /#2G00X100.0; N#3Y200.0; 389
  • Page 41115. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 15.2 System variables can be used to read and write internal NC data such as tool compensation values and current position data. Note, however, that SYSTEM VARIABLES some system variables can only be read. System variables are essential for automation and ge
  • Page 412B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO Table 15.2 (d) System variables for tool compensation memory C Cutter compensation Tool length compensation (H) (D) Compensation number Geomet- Wear Geometric Wear ric com- com- compensation compensation pensation pensation 1 #11001(#2201) #10001(#2001) #130
  • Page 41315. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Time information Time information can be read and written. Table 15.2 (f) System variables for time information Variable Function number #3001 This variable functions as a timer that counts in 1–millisecond increments at all times. When the power is turned
  • Page 414B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO Table 15.2 (h) System variable (#3004) for automatic operation control #3004 Feed hold Feedrate Override Exact stop 0 Enabled Enabled Enabled 1 Disabled Enabled Enabled 2 Enabled Disabled Enabled 3 Disabled Disabled Enabled 4 Enabled Enabled Disabled 5 Disab
  • Page 41515. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Settings Settings can be read and written. Binary values are converted to decimals. #3005 #15 #14 #13 #12 #11 #10 #9 #8 Setting FCV #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Setting SEQ INI ISO TVC #9 (FCV) : Whether to use the FS15 tape format conversion capability #5 (SEQ
  • Page 416B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO D Number of machined The number (target number) of parts required and the number (completion parts number) of machined parts can be read and written. Table 15.2(i) System variables for the number of parts required and the num- ber of machined parts Variable
  • Page 41715. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Current position Position information cannot be written but can be read. Table 15.2 (k) System variables for position information Read Tool com- Variable Position Coordinate operation pensation number information system during value movement #5001–#5008 Bl
  • Page 418B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO D Workpiece coordinate Workpiece zero point offset values can be read and written. system compensation Table 15.2 (l) System variables for workpiece zero point offset values values (workpiece zero point offset values) Variable Function number #5201 First–axi
  • Page 41915. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 The following variables can also be used: Axis Function Variable number First axis External workpiece zero point offset #2500 #5201 G54 workpiece zero point offset #2501 #5221 G55 workpiece zero point offset #2502 #5241 G56 workpiece zero point offset #2503
  • Page 420B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO 15.3 The operations listed in Table 15.3(a) can be performed on variables. The expression to the right of the operator can contain constants and/or ARITHMETIC AND variables combined by a function or operator. Variables #j and #K in an LOGIC OPERATION express
  • Page 42115. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D ARCTAN #i = S Specify the lengths of two sides, separated by a slash (/). ATAN[#j]/[#k]; S The solution ranges are as follows: When the NAT bit (bit 0 of parameter 6004) is set to 0: 0o to 360_ [Example] When #1 = ATAN[–1]/[–1]; is specified, #1 is 225.0.
  • Page 422B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO D Rounding up and down With CNC, when the absolute value of the integer produced by an to an integer operation on a number is greater than the absolute value of the original number, such an operation is referred to as rounding up to an integer. Conversely, w
  • Page 42315. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Limitations D Brackets Brackets ([, ]) are used to enclose an expression. Note that parentheses are used for comments. D Operation error Errors may occur when operations are performed. Table 15.3 (b) Errors involved in operations Average Maximum Operation Ty
  • Page 424B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO S Also be aware of errors that can result from conditional expressions using EQ, NE, GE, GT, LE, and LT. Example: IF[#1 EQ #2] is effected by errors in both #1 and #2, possibly resulting in an incorrect decision. Therefore, instead find the difference betwee
  • Page 42515. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 15.4 The following blocks are referred to as macro statements: S Blocks containing an arithmetic or logic operation (=) MACRO S Blocks containing a control statement (such as GOTO, DO, END) STATEMENTS AND S Blocks containing a macro call command (such as mac
  • Page 426B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO 15.5 In a program, the flow of control can be changed using the GOTO statement and IF statement. Three types of branch and repetition BRANCH AND operations are used: REPETITION Branch and repetition GOTO statement (unconditional branch) IF statement (conditi
  • Page 42715. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Operators Operators each consist of two letters and are used to compare two values to determine whether they are equal or one value is smaller or greater than the other value. Note that the inequality sign cannot be used. Table 15.5.2 Operators Operator Me
  • Page 428B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO D Nesting The identification numbers (1 to 3) in a DO–END loop can be used as many times as desired. Note, however, when a program includes crossing repetition loops (overlapped DO ranges), P/S alarm No. 124 occurs. 1. The identification numbers 3. DO loops
  • Page 42915. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Sample program The sample program below finds the total of numbers 1 to 10. O0001; #1=0; #2=1; WHILE[#2 LE 10]DO 1; #1=#1+#2; #2=#2+1; END 1; M30; 408
  • Page 430B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO 15.6 A macro program can be called using the following methods: MACRO CALL Macro call Simple call (G65) modal call (G66, G67) Macro call with G code Macro call with M code Subprogram call with M code Subprogram call with T code Limitations D Differences betw
  • Page 43115. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 15.6.1 When G65 is specified, the custom macro specified at address P is called. Simple Call (G65) Data (argument) can be passed to the custom macro program. G65 P p L ȏ ; P : Number of the program to call ȏ : Repetition count (1 by
  • Page 432B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO Argument specification II Argument specification II uses A, B, and C once each and uses I, J, and K up to ten times. Argument specification II is used to pass values such as three–dimensional coordinates as arguments. Address Variable Address Variable Addres
  • Page 43315. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Local variable levels S Local variables from level 0 to 4 are provided for nesting. S The level of the main program is 0. S Each time a macro is called (with G65 or G66), the local variable level is incremented by one. The values of the local variables at
  • Page 434B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO Sample program A macro is created which drills H holes at intervals of B degrees after a (bolt hole circle) start angle of A degrees along the periphery of a circle with radius I. The center of the circle is (X,Y). Commands can be specified in either the abs
  • Page 43515. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Macro program O9100; (called program) #3=#4003; Stores G code of group 3. G81 Z#26 R#18 F#9 K0; (Note) Drilling cycle. Note: L0 can also be used. IF[#3 EQ 90]GOTO 1; Branches to N1 in the G90 mode. #24=#5001+#24; Calculates the X coordinate of the center.
  • Page 436B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO D Call nesting Calls can be nested to a depth of four levels including simple calls (G65) and modal calls (G66). This does not include subprogram calls (M98). D Modal call nesting Modal calls can be nested by specifying another G66 code during a modal call.
  • Page 43715. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Macro program O9110; (program called) #1=#4001; Stores G00/G01. #3=#4003; Stores G90/G91. #4=#4109; Stores the cutting feedrate. #5=#5003; Stores the Z coordinate at the start of drilling. G00 G90 Z#18; Positioning at position R G01 Z#26 F#9; Cutting feed
  • Page 438B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO Limitations D Nesting of calls using G In a program called with a G code, no macros can be called using a G code. codes A G code in such a program is treated as an ordinary G code. In a program called as a subprogram with an M or T code, no macros can be cal
  • Page 43915. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 15.6.5 By setting an M code number used to call a subprogram (macro program) Subprogram Call in a parameter, the macro program can be called in the same way as with a subprogram call (M98). Using an M Code O0001 ; O9001 ; : : M03 ; : : : M30 ; M99 ; Paramete
  • Page 440B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO 15.6.6 By enabling subprograms (macro program) to be called with a T code in Subprogram Calls a parameter, a macro program can be called each time the T code is specified in the machining program. Using a T Code O0001 ; O9000 ; : : T23 ; : : : M30 ; M99 ; Bi
  • Page 44115. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 15.6.7 By using the subprogram call function that uses M codes, the cumulative Sample Program usage time of each tool is measured. Conditions S The cumulative usage time of each of tools T01 to T05 is measured. No measurement is made for tools with numbers g
  • Page 442B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO Macro program O9001(M03); Macro to start counting (program called) M01; IF[#4120 EQ 0]GOTO 9; No tool specified IF[#4120 GT 5]GOTO 9; Out–of–range tool number #3002=0; Clears the timer. N9 M03; Rotates the spindle in the forward direction. M99; O9002(M05); M
  • Page 44315. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 15.7 For smooth machining, the CNC prereads the NC statement to be performed next. This operation is referred to as buffering. In cutter PROCESSING compensation mode (G41, G42), the NC prereads NC statements two or MACRO three blocks ahead to find intersecti
  • Page 444B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO D Buffering the next block in cutter compensation > N1 G01 G41 G91 X50.0 Y30.0 F100 Dd ; mode (G41, G42) N2 #1=100 ; > : Block being executed N3 X100.0 ; j : Blocks read into the buffer N4 #2=200 ; N5 Y50.0 ; : N1 N3 NC statement execution N2 N4 Macro statem
  • Page 44515. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 15.8 Custom macro programs are similar to subprograms. They can be registered and edited in the same way as subprograms. The storage REGISTERING capacity is determined by the total length of tape used to store both custom CUSTOM MACRO macros and subprograms.
  • Page 446B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO 15.9 LIMITATIONS D MDI operation The macro call command can be specified in MDI mode. During automatic operation, however, it is impossible to switch to the MDI mode for a macro program call. D Sequence number A custom macro program cannot be searched for a
  • Page 44715. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 15.10 In addition to the standard custom macro commands, the following macro commands are available. They are referred to as external output EXTERNAL OUTPUT commands. COMMANDS – BPRNT – DPRNT – POPEN – PCLOS These commands are provided to output variable val
  • Page 448B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO Example ) BPRNT [ C** X#100 [3] Y#101 [3] M#10 [0] ] Variable value #100=0.40956 #101=–1638.4 #10=12.34 LF 12 (0000000C) M –1638400(FFE70000) Y 410 (0000019A) X Space C D Data output command DPRNT DPRNT [ a #b [cd] …] Number of significant decimal places Num
  • Page 44915. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Example ) DPRNT [ X#2 [53] Y#5 [53] T#30 [20] ] Variable value #2=128.47398 #5=–91.2 #30=123.456 (1) Parameter PRT(No.6001#1)=0 LF T sp 23 Y – sp sp sp 91200 X sp sp sp 128474 (2) Parameter PRT(No.6001#1)=0 LF T23 Y–91.200 X128.474 D Close command PCLOS PCLO
  • Page 450B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO NOTE 1 It is not necessary to always specify the open command (POPEN), data output command (BPRNT, DPRNT), and close command (PCLOS) together. Once an open command is specified at the beginning of a program, it does not need to be specified again except afte
  • Page 45115. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 15.11 When a program is being executed, another program can be called by inputting an interrupt signal (UINT) from the machine. This function is INTERRUPTION TYPE referred to as an interruption type custom macro function. Program an CUSTOM MACRO interrupt co
  • Page 452B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO CAUTION When the interrupt signal (UINT, marked by * in Fig. 15.11) is input after M97 is specified, it is ignored. And, the interrupt signal must not be input during execution of the interrupt program. 15.11.1 Specification Method Explanations D Interrupt c
  • Page 45315. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 15.11.2 Details of Functions Explanations D Subprogram–type There are two types of custom macro interrupts: Subprogram–type interrupt and macro–type interrupts and macro–type interrupts. The interrupt type used is selected interrupt by MSB (bit 5 of paramete
  • Page 454B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO (iii) If there are no NC statements in the interrupt program, control is returned to the interrupted program by M99, then the program is restarted from the command in the interrupted block. Interrupted by macro interrupt ÉÉÉÉ Execution in ÉÉÉÉ progress Norma
  • Page 45515. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Conditions for enabling The interrupt signal becomes valid after execution starts of a block that and disabling the custom contains M96 for enabling custom macro interrupts. The signal becomes macro interrupt signal invalid when execution starts of a block
  • Page 456B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO D Custom macro interrupt There are two schemes for custom macro interrupt signal (UINT) input: signal (UINT) The status–triggered scheme and edge– triggered scheme. When the status–triggered scheme is used, the signal is valid when it is on. When the edge tr
  • Page 45715. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Return from a custom To return control from a custom macro interrupt to the interrupted macro interrupt program, specify M99. A sequence number in the interrupted program can also be specified using address P. If this is specified, the program is searched
  • Page 458B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO NOTE When an M99 block consists only of address O, N, P, L, or M, this block is regarded as belonging to the previous block in the program. Therefore, a single–block stop does not occur for this block. In terms of programming, the following  and  are basic
  • Page 45915. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 (2) After control is returned to the interrupted program, modal information is specified again as necessary. O∆∆∆∆ M96Pxxx Oxxx; Interrupt signal (UINT) Modify modal information (Without P specification) Modal information remains M99(Pffff); unchanged before
  • Page 460B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO D Custom macro interrupt When the interrupt signal (UINT) is input and an interrupt program is and custom macro called, the custom macro modal call is canceled (G67). However, when modal call G66 is specified in the interrupt program, the custom macro modal
  • Page 46116. PATTERN DATA INPUT FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 16 PATTERN DATA INPUT FUNCTION This function enables users to perform programming simply by extracting numeric data (pattern data) from a drawing and specifying the numerical values from the MDI panel. This eliminates the need for programming
  • Page 46216. PATTERN DATA INPUT B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING FUNCTION 16.1 Pressing the OFFSET SETTING key and [MENU] is displayed on the following DISPLAYING THE pattern menu screen. PATTERN MENU MENU : HOLE PATTERN O0000 N00000 1. TAPPING 2. DRILLING 3. BORING 4. POCKET 5. BOLT HOLE 6. LINE ANGLE 7. GRID 8. PE
  • Page 46316. PATTERN DATA INPUT FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Macro commands Menu title : C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9C10 C11 C12 specifying the menu C1,C2, ,C12 : Characters in the menu title (12 characters) title Macro instruction G65 H90 Pp Qq Rr Ii Jj Kk : H90:Specifies the menu title p : Assume a1 a
  • Page 46416. PATTERN DATA INPUT B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING FUNCTION D Macro instruction Pattern name: C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9C10 describing the pattern C1, C2, ,C10: Characters in the pattern name (10 characters) name Macro instruction G65 H91 Pn Qq Rr Ii Jj Kk ; H91: Specifies the menu title n : Specifies
  • Page 46516. PATTERN DATA INPUT FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Example Custom macros for the menu title and hole pattern names. MENU : HOLE PATTERN O0000 N00000 1. TAPPING 2. DRILLING 3. BORING 4. POCKET 5. BOLT HOLE 6. LINE ANGLE 7. GRID 8. PECK 9. TEST PATRN 10. BACK > _ MDI **** *** *** 16:05:59 [ MACR
  • Page 46616. PATTERN DATA INPUT B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING FUNCTION 16.2 When a pattern menu is selected, the necessary pattern data is displayed. PATTERN DATA DISPLAY VAR. : BOLT HOLE O0001 N00000 NO. NAME DATA COMMENT 500 TOOL 0.000 501 STANDARD X 0.000 *BOLT HOLE 502 STANDARD Y 0.000 CIRCLE* 503 RADIUS 0.00
  • Page 46716. PATTERN DATA INPUT FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Macro instruction Menu title : C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9C10C11C12 specifying the pattern C1 ,C2, , C12 : Characters in the menu title (12 characters) … data title Macro instruction (the menu title) G65 H92 Pp Qq Rr Ii Jj Kk ; H92 : Specifies
  • Page 46816. PATTERN DATA INPUT B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING FUNCTION D Macro instruction to One comment line: C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10 C11 C12 describe a comment C1, C2,…, C12 : Character string in one comment line (12 characters) Macro instruction G65 H94 Pp Qq Rr Ii Jj Kk ; H94 : Specifies the comment p
  • Page 46916. PATTERN DATA INPUT FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Examples Macro instruction to describe a parameter title , the variable name, and a comment. VAR. : BOLT HOLE O0001 N00000 NO. NAME DATA COMMENT 500 TOOL 0.000 501 STANDARD X 0.000 *BOLT HOLE 502 STANDARD Y 0.000 CIRCLE* 503 RADIUS 0.000 SET P
  • Page 47016. PATTERN DATA INPUT B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING FUNCTION 16.3 CHARACTERS AND CODES TO BE USED FOR THE PATTERN DATA INPUT Table. 16.3 (a) Characters and codes to be used for the pattern data input function FUNCTION Char- Char- Code Comment Code Comment acter acter A 065 6 054 B 066 7 055 C 067 8 056
  • Page 47116. PATTERN DATA INPUT FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Table 16.3 (b) Numbers of subprograms employed in the pattern data input function Subprogram No. Function O9500 Specifies character strings displayed on the pattern data menu. O9501 Specifies a character string of the pattern data correspondin
  • Page 47217. PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING ENTRY (G10) 17 PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER ENTRY (G10) General The values of parameters can be entered in a lprogram. This function is used for setting pitch error compensation data when attachments are changed or the maximum cutting feedrate or cutting
  • Page 47317. PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER ENTRY (G10) PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Examples 1. Set bit 2 (SBP) of bit type parameter No. 3404 G10L50 ; Parameter entry mode N3404 R 00000100 ; SBP setting G11 ; cancel parameter entry mode 2. Change the values for the Z–axis (3rd axis) and A–axis (4th axis) in axis type
  • Page 47418. MEMORY OPERATION USING B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING FS15 TAPE FORMAT 18 MEMORY OPERATION USING FS15 TAPE FORMAT General Memory operation of the program registered by FS15 tape format is possible with setting of the setting parameter (No. 0001#1). Explanations Data formats for cutter compensation, su
  • Page 47519. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 19 HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS 454
  • Page 476B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS 19.1 HIGH–SPEED CYCLE CUTTING General This function can convert the machining profile to a data group that can be distributed as pulses at high–speed by the macro compiler and macro executor. The function can also call and execute the data gr
  • Page 47719. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Alarms Alarm Descriptions number 115 The contents of the header are invalid. This alarm is issued in the following cases. 1. The header corresponding to the number of the specified call machining cycle was not found. 2. A cycle connection dat
  • Page 478B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS 19.2 When an arc is cut at a high speed in circular interpolation, a radial error exists between the actual tool path and the programmed arc. An FEEDRATE approximation of this error can be obtained from the following CLAMPING BY ARC expressio
  • Page 47919. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 19.3 This function is designed for high–speed precise machining. With this function, the delay due to acceleration/deceleration and the delay in the LOOK-AHEAD servo system which increase as the feedrate becomes higher can be CONTROL (G08) su
  • Page 480B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS D Functions that cannot be In the look–ahead control mode, the functions listed below cannot be specified specified. To specify these functions, cancel the look–ahead control mode, specify the desired function, then set look–ahead control mod
  • Page 48119. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 19.4 A remote buffer can continuously supply a large amount of data to the CNC at high speeds when connected to the host computer or input/output HIGH–SPEED equipment via a serial interface. REMOTE BUFFER RS–232–C / RS–422 Host Remote compute
  • Page 482B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS Format VBinary input operation enabled : G05; VBinary input operation disabled : The travel distance along all axes are set to zero. VData format for binary input operation Byte High byte 1st axis Data Low byte sequence High byte 2nd axis Low
  • Page 48319. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 * * * * * * * 0 * * * * * * * 0 Example: When the travel distance is 700 µm per unit time (millimeter machine with increment system IS–B) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0
  • Page 484B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS 19.4.2 High–speed remote buffer A uses binary data. On the other hand, High–Speed Remote high–speed remote buffer B can directly use NC language coded with equipment such as an automatic programming unit to perform high–speed Buffer B (G05) m
  • Page 48519. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 19.5 Some machining errors are due to the CNC. Such errors include machining errors caused by acceleration/deceleration after interpolation. HIGH–PRECISION To eliminate these errors, the following functions are performed at high CONTOUR CONTR
  • Page 486B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS I, J, K, R : I, J, K, and R specified for circular interpolation Data for movement along axis : Data for moving the tool along the axis set in parameter No. 1020 (any axis selected from X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, and C) () : Control–in and contr
  • Page 48719. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D When unspecifiable data In the HPCC mode, specifying unspecifiable data causes an alarm No. is specified 5000. To specify a program containing unspecifiable data, specify G05P0 to exit from the HPCC mode before specifying the program. < Sam
  • Page 488B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS S When the offset mode is canceled temporarily In the HPCC mode, automatic reference position return (G28) and automatic return from the reference position (G29) cannot be specified. Therefore, commands that must cancel the offset mode tempor
  • Page 48919. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 (2) When a block containing no movement operation is specified together with the cutter compensation cancel code (G40), a vector with a length equal to the offset value is created in a direction perpendicular to the movement direction of the
  • Page 490B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS D Positioning and auxiliary When bit 1 of parameter MSU No. 8403 is set to 1, G00, M, S, T, and B functions codes can be specified even in HPCC mode. When specifying these codes in HPCC mode, note the following: (1) When a G00, M, S, T, or B
  • Page 49119. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 (2) When G00 is specified with bit 7 of parameter SG0 No. 8403 set to 1, the following points should be noted: ⋅Since the G00 command is replaced by the G01 command, the tool moves at the feedrate set in parameter No. 8481 even when data is s
  • Page 492B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS Limitations D Modes that can be Before G05P10000 can be specified, the following modal values must be specified set. If they are not set, the P/S alarm No. 5012 is issued. G code Meaning G13.1 Cancels polar coordinate interpolation. G15 Cance
  • Page 49319. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 19.6 By taking full advantage of high–precision contour control using a RISC processor, this function enables high–speed high–precision machining SIMPLE without the need for special hardware. HIGH–PRECISION The function enables look–ahead lin
  • Page 494B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS Interpolation functions Ę Can be programmed Cannot be programmed Name Description Positioning (G00) Ę (Positioning of linear interpolation type) Single direction positioning (G60) Exact stop (G09) Ę Exact stop mode (G61) Ę Tapping mode (G63)
  • Page 49519. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Name Description Return to initial point in canned Ę * cycle (G98) /Return to R point in canned cycle (G99) Normal direction control (G41.1,G42.1) Continuous dressing In–feed control Index table indexing G161) High–speed cycle machining Absol
  • Page 496B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS Program input Ę Can be programmed Cannot be programmed Name Description Plane selection (G17,G18,G19) Ę Local coordinate system (G52) Ę * Workpiece coordinate system Ę * (G54–G59) (G54.1Pxx) Workpiece coordinate system Ę (G92) Workpiece coord
  • Page 49719. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Name Description MDI operation When G05.1 Q1 is specified in MDI mode, P/S alarm No. 5113 is issued. The operation mode cannot be switched to MDI mode in simple high– precision contour control mode. Manual intervention Upon restart after manu
  • Page 498B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS 19.7 During high–speed machining, the distribution processing status is monitored. When distribution processing terminates, P/S alarm No. 000 DISTRIBUTION and P/S alarm No. 179 are issued upon completion of the high–speed PROCESSING machining
  • Page 49919. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 19.8 The high–speed linear interpolation function processes a move command related to a controlled axis not by ordinary linear interpolation but by HIGH–SPEED high–speed linear interpolation. The function enables the high–speed LINEAR executi
  • Page 500B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS (Maximum feedrate) = 8 122,848 (IS–B, metric input) (interpolation period) Minimum Interpolation period: Interpolation period: feedrate 8 msec 4 msec (IS–B, metric input) 4 mm/min 8 mm/min (IS–B, inch input) 0.38 inch/min 0.76 inch/mim (IS–C,
  • Page 50119. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Single–block operation Single–block operation is disabled in high–speed linear interpolation mode. : G05 P2 ; X10 Z20 F1000 ; : : Handled as a single block : Y30 ; G05 P0 ; : D Feed hold Feed hold is disabled in high–speed linear interpolat
  • Page 502B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS 20 AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS 481
  • Page 50320. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 20.1 It is possible to change the operating mode for two or more specified axes to either synchronous operation or normal operation by an input signal SIMPLE from the machine. SYNCHRONOUS Synchronous control can be performed for up to four pairs of
  • Page 504B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS D Normal operation This operating mode is used for machining different workpieces on each table. The operation is the same as in ordinary CNC control, where the movement of the master axis and slave axis is controlled by the independent axis addres
  • Page 50520. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Limitations D Setting a coordinate In synchronous axis control, commands that require no axis motion, such system as the workpiece coordinate system setup command (G92) and the local coordinate system setup command (G52), are set to the Y axis by p
  • Page 506B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS 20.2 The roll–over function prevents coordinates for the rotation axis from overflowing. The roll–over function is enabled by setting bit 0 of ROTARY AXIS parameter ROAx 1008 to 1. ROLL–OVER Explanations For an incremental command, the tool moves t
  • Page 50720. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 20.3 To replace the tool damaged during machining or to check the status of machining, the tool can be withdrawn from a workpiece. The tool can TOOL WITHDRAWAL then be advanced again to restart machining efficiently. AND RETURN (G10.6) The tool wit
  • Page 508B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS Explanations D Retraction When the TOOL WITHDRAW switch on the machine operator’s panel is turned on during automatic operation or in the automatic operation stop or hold state, the tool is retracted the length of the programmed retraction distance
  • Page 50920. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Limitations D offset If the origin, presetting, or workpiece origin offset value (or External workpiece origin offset value) is changed after retraction is specified with G10.6 in absolute mode, the change is not reflected in the retraction positio
  • Page 510B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS 20.4 When enough torque for driving a large table cannot be produced by only one motor, two motors can be used for movement along a single axis. TANDEM CONTROL Positioning is performed by the main motor only. The submotor is used only to produce to
  • Page 51120. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 20.5 When the angular axis makes an angle other than 90° with the perpendicular axis, the angular axis control function controls the distance ANGULAR AXIS traveled along each axis according to the inclination angle. For the CONTROL/ANGULAR ordinary
  • Page 512B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS D Absolute and relative An absolute and a relative position are indicated in the programmed position display Cartesian coordinate system. D Machine position display A machine position indication is provided in the machine coordinate system where an
  • Page 51320. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 20.6 When contour grinding is performed, the chopping function can be used to grind the side face of a workpiece. By means of this function, while CHOPPING the grinding axis (the axis with the grinding wheel) is being moved FUNCTION vertically, a c
  • Page 514B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS The chopping feedrate is clamped to the maximum chopping feedrate (set with parameter No. 8375) if the specified feedrate is greater than the maximum chopping feedrate. The feedrate can be overridden by 0% to 150% by applying the chopping feedrate
  • Page 51520. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 (2) When the lower dead point is changed during movement from the upper dead point to the lower dead point Previous upper dead point New lower dead point Previous lower dead point The tool first moves to the previous lower dead point, then to the u
  • Page 516B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS D Servo delay When high–speed chopping is performed with the grinding axis, a servo compensation function delay and acceleration/deceleration delay occur. These delays prevent the tool from actually reaching the specified position. The control unit
  • Page 51720. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Mode switching during If the mode is changed during chopping, chopping does not stop. In chopping manual mode, the chopping axis cannot be moved manually. It can, however, be moved manually by means of the manual interrupt. D Reset during choppin
  • Page 518B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS D Program restart When a program contains G codes for starting chopping (G81.1) and stopping chopping (G80), an attempt to restart that program results in a P/S 5050 alarm being output. When a program that does not include the chopping axis is rest
  • Page 51920. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 20.7 Gears can be cut by turning the workpiece (C–axis) in sync with the rotation of the spindle (hob axis) connected to a hob. HOBBING MACHINE Also, a helical gear can be cut by turning the workpiece (C–axis) in sync FUNCTION (G80, G81) with the m
  • Page 520B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS D Releasing the Synchronization between the hob axis and C–axis can also be canceled synchronization status when: ⋅ The power is turned off. ⋅ An emergency stop or servo alarm occurs. ⋅ A reset (external reset signal, reset & rewind signal, or rese
  • Page 52120. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Direction of helical gear 1 When bit 2 (HDR) of parameter No. 7700 = 1 compensation (a) (b) (c) (d) +Z +C +Z +C +Z +C +Z +C –Z –Z –Z –Z C: + C: + C: + C: + Z: + Z: + Z: – Z: – P: + P: – P: + P: – Compensation Compensation Compensation Compensatio
  • Page 522B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS D Setting the helical gear The Z–axis (axial feed axis) is usually the third axis. However, any axis axial feed axis can be set as the Z–axis by setting the corresponding parameter appropriately (parameter No. 7709). D C–axis servo delay The servo
  • Page 52320. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 ⋅ Method in which compensation for the delay when a command is specified is performed (G82, G83) G82: Cancels C–axis servo delay compensation. G83: Executes C–axis servo delay compensation. (Example) G81 T__ L__ ; · · · Starts synchronization. M03
  • Page 524B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS S In C–axis servo delay compensation (G83), compensation is not applied to the integer part of the gear pitch. The compensation direction is opposite to that of the C–axis rotation. D C–axis synchronous S C–axis handle interrupt shift During synchr
  • Page 52520. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 20.8 In the same way as with the hobbing machine function, to machine (grind/cut) a gear, the rotation of the workpiece axis connected to a servo SIMPLE ELECTRIC motor is synchronized with the rotation of the tool axis (grinding GEAR BOX wheel/hob)
  • Page 526B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS The rotation direction of the workpiece axis depends on the rotation direction of the tool axis. That is, when the rotation direction of the tool axis is positive, the rotation direction of the workpiece axis is also positive; when the rotation dir
  • Page 52720. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 D Direction of helical gear 1 When bit 2 (HDR) of parameter No. 7700 = 1 compensation (a) (b) (c) (d) +Z +C +Z +C +Z +C +Z +C –Z –Z –Z –Z C : + C : + C : + C : + Z : + Z : + Z : – Z : – P : + P : – P : + P : – Compensation Compensation Compensation
  • Page 528B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS D Coordinates in helical In helical compensation, the machine coordinates and absolute compensation coordinates of the workpiece axis (4th axis) are updated by the amount of helical compensation. D Retraction By turning on the retract signal RTRCT
  • Page 52920. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Examples O1000 ; N0010 M19 ; Performs tool axis orientation. N0020 G28 G91 C0 ; Performs reference position return operation of the workpiece axis. N0030 G81 T20 L1 ; Starts synchronization between the tool axis and workpiece axis. (The workpiece a
  • Page 530B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS 20.9 The retreat and retry functions incorporate those functions that are needed to enable retreat and retry operations with a PMC and custom macros. RETREAT AND Even if machining is interrupted by a reset or emergency stop, the tool can RETRY FUNC
  • Page 53120. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 (1) After specifying positioning at a machining start point, specify a sequence number from 7000 to 7998 in a block where various preparatory functions (M, S, and T) for machining cycles are specified. The start point of a block where a sequence nu
  • Page 532B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS Explanations D Retreat function Each machine tool builder is to create a retreat function program, which is started from the PMC by using a workpiece number search capability or program number search capability. For detailed information, refer to t
  • Page 53320. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 (Example) Machining program ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ N7000 M29 S1000 ; N8000 G84 X20. Y20. R–10. Z–30. F500 ; N8010 X50. Y50. ; N8020 X100. Y100 . ; G80 ; ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ Retreat program ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ IF [#mmm NE 29 ] GOTO 1000 ; G30 P99 M29 S1000 ; G00 Z–10. ; G00 X
  • Page 534B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING 20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS D Macro variables Information required for the machining return and restart functions is stored in macro variables. The start number of those variables is to be set in parameter No. 7351. Twenty–five successive variables starting with the variable
  • Page 53520. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 Examples O1000 ; ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ G00 X100. Y100. Z100. ; (A) N7010 M101 T10 S100 ; (B) G00 X0. Y0. Z0. ; (C) N8010 G01 Z– 20. F100 ; (D) Z– 40. ; (E) Y20. ; (F) N9010 G00 Z0. ; (G) X20. ; (H) N8020 G01 Z– 40. F200 ; (I) Z– 60. ; (J) Y40. ; (
  • Page 53621. TWO–PATH CONTROL B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING FUNCTION 21 TWO-PATH CONTROL FUNCTION 515
  • Page 53721. TWO–PATH CONTROL FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 21.1 The two–path control function is designed for use on a machining center where two systems are operated independently to simultaneously perform GENERAL cutting. D Controlling two path The operations of two path are programmed independently o
  • Page 53821. TWO–PATH CONTROL B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING FUNCTION 21.2 WAITING FOR PATHS Explanations Control based on M codes is used to cause one path to wait for the other during machining. By specifying an M code in a machining program for each path, the two paths can wait for each other at a specified blo
  • Page 53921. TWO–PATH CONTROL FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 NOTE 1 An M code for waiting must always be specified in a single block. 2 If one path is waiting because of an M code for waiting specified, and a different M code for waiting is specified with the other path, an P/S alarm (No. 160) is raised,
  • Page 54021. TWO–PATH CONTROL B–63014EN/02 PROGRAMMING FUNCTION 21.3 A machine with two paths have different custom macro common variables and tool compensation memory areas for path 1 and 2. Paths 1 MEMORY COMMON and 2 can share the custom macro common variables and tool TO PATH compensation memory areas pr
  • Page 54121. TWO–PATH CONTROL FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63014EN/02 21.4 In a CNC supporting two–path control, specified machining programs can be copied between the two paths by setting bit 0 (PCP) of parameter COPYING A No. 3206 to 1. A copy operation can be performed by specifying either PROGRAM a single prog
  • Page 542III. OPERATIO
  • Page 543B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 1. GENERAL 1 GENERAL 523
  • Page 5441. GENERAL OPERATION B–63014EN/02 1.1 MANUAL OPERATION Explanations D Manual reference The CNC machine tool has a position used to determine the machine position return position. (See Section III–3.1) This position is called the reference position, where the tool is replaced or the coordinate are se
  • Page 545B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 1. GENERAL D The tool movement by Using machine operator’s panel switches, pushbuttons, or the manual manual operation handle, the tool can be moved along each axis. Machine operator’s panel Manual pulse generator Tool Workpiece Fig. 1.1 (b) The tool movement by manual operati
  • Page 5461. GENERAL OPERATION B–63014EN/02 1.2 Automatic operation is to operate the machine according to the created program. It includes memory, MDI and DNC operations. (See Section TOOL MOVEMENT III–4). BY PROGRAMING– AUTOMATIC Program 01000 ; OPERATION M_S_T ; G92_X_ ; Tool G00... ; G01...... ; . . . . F
  • Page 547B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 1. GENERAL 1.3 AUTOMATIC OPERATION Explanations D Program selection Select the program used for the workpiece. Ordinarily, one program is prepared for one workpiece. If two or more programs are in memory, select the program to be used, by searching the program number (Section
  • Page 5481. GENERAL OPERATION B–63014EN/02 D Handle interruption While automatic operation is being executed, tool movement can overlap (See Section III–4.8) automatic operation by rotating the manual handle. Tool position during Z automatic operation Tool position after handle interruption Programmed depth
  • Page 549B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 1. GENERAL 1.4 Before machining is started, the automatic running check can be executed. It checks whether the created program can operate the machine TESTING A as desired. This check can be accomplished by running the machine PROGRAM actually or viewing the position display c
  • Page 5501. GENERAL OPERATION B–63014EN/02 D Single block When the cycle start pushbutton is pressed, the tool executes one (See Section III–5.5) operation then stops. By pressing the cycle start again, the tool executes the next operation then stops. The program is checked in this manner. Cycle start Cycle
  • Page 551B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 1. GENERAL 1.5 After a created program is once registered in memory, it can be corrected or modified from the MDI panel (See Section III–9). EDITING A PART This operation can be executed using the part program storage/edit PROGRAM function. Program registration Program correct
  • Page 5521. GENERAL OPERATION B–63014EN/02 1.6 The operator can display or change a value stored in CNC internal memory by key operation on the MDI screen (See III–11). DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA Data setting Data display Screen Keys MDI CNC memory Fig. 1.6 (a) Displaying and Setting Data Explanations D Off
  • Page 553B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 1. GENERAL 1st tool path Machined shape 2nd tool path Offset value of the 1st tool Offset value of the 2nd tool Fig. 1.6 (c) Offset Value D Displaying and setting Apart from parameters, there is data that is set by the operator in operator’s setting data operation. This data c
  • Page 5541. GENERAL OPERATION B–63014EN/02 D Displaying and setting The CNC functions have versatility in order to take action in parameters characteristics of various machines. For example, CNC can specify the following: S Rapid traverse rate of each axis S Whether increment system is based on metric system
  • Page 555B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 1. GENERAL 1.7 DISPLAY 1.7.1 The contents of the currently active program are displayed. In addition, Program Display the programs scheduled next and the program list are displayed. (See Section III–11.2.1) Active sequence number Active program number PROGRAM 1100 00005 N1 G90
  • Page 5561. GENERAL OPERATION B–63014EN/02 1.7.2 The current position of the tool is displayed with the coordinate values. Current Position The distance from the current position to the target position can also be displayed. (See Section III–11.1.1 to 11.1.3) Display Y x y X Workpiece coordinate system ACTUA
  • Page 557B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 1. GENERAL 1.7.4 When this option is selected, two types of run time and number of parts Parts Count Display, are displayed on the screen. (See Section lll–11.4.5) Run Time Display ACTUAL POSITION (ABSOLUTE) O0003 N00003 X 150.000 Y 300.000 Z 100.000 PART COUNT 18 RUN TIME 0H1
  • Page 5581. GENERAL OPERATION B–63014EN/02 1.8 Programs, offset values, parameters, etc. input in CNC memory can be output to paper tape, cassette, or a floppy disk for saving. After once DATA INPUT/OUTPUT output to a medium, the data can be input into CNC memory. Portable tape reader FANUC PPR Memory Paper
  • Page 559B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES 2 OPERATIONAL DEVICES The available operational devices include the setting and display unit attached to the CNC, the machine operator’s panel, and external input/output devices such as a, Handy File and etc. 539
  • Page 5602. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B–63014EN/02 2.1 The setting and display units are shown in Subsections 2.1.1 to 2.1.5 of Part III. SETTING AND DISPLAY UNITS CNC Control Unit with 7.2”/8.4” LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III–2.1.1 CNC Control Unit with 9.5”/10.4” LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
  • Page 561B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES 2.1.1 CNC Control Unit with 7.2”/8.4” LCD 2.1.2 CNC Control Unit with 9.5”/10.4” LCD 541
  • Page 5622. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B–63014EN/02 2.1.3 Stand–Alone Type Small MDI Unit Address/numeric keys Function keys Shift key Cancel (CAN) key Input key Edit keys Help key Reset key Cursor keys Page change keys 542
  • Page 563B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES 2.1.4 Stand–Alone Type Standard MDI Unit Address/numeric keys Help key Reset key Edit keys Cancel (CAN) key Input key Shift key Function keys Page change keys Cursor keys 543
  • Page 5642. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B–63014EN/02 2.1.5 Stand–Alone Type 61 Full Key MDI Unit Reset key Address/numeric keys Function keys Shift key Help key Page change keys Cursor keys Cancel (CAN) key Input key Edit keys 544
  • Page 565B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES 2.2 EXPLANATION OF THE KEYBOARD Table 2.2 Explanation of the MDI keyboard Number Name Explanation 1 RESET key Press this key to reset the CNC, to cancel an alarm, etc. RESET 2 HELP key Press this button to use the help function when uncertain about the o
  • Page 5662. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B–63014EN/02 Table 2.2 Explanation of the MDI keyboard Number Name Explanation 10 Cursor move keys There are four different cursor move keys. : This key is used to move the cursor to the right or in the forward direction. The cursor is moved in short units in the for
  • Page 567B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES 2.3 The function keys are used to select the type of screen (function) to be displayed. When a soft key (section select soft key) is pressed FUNCTION KEYS immediately after a function key, the screen (section) corresponding to the AND SOFT KEYS selected
  • Page 5682. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B–63014EN/02 2.3.2 Function keys are provided to select the type of screen to be displayed. Function Keys The following function keys are provided on the MDI panel: POS Press this key to display the position screen. PROG Press this key to display the program screen.
  • Page 569B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES 2.3.3 To display a more detailed screen, press a function key followed by a soft Soft Keys key. Soft keys are also used for actual operations. The following illustrates how soft key displays are changed by pressing each function key. The symbols in the f
  • Page 5702. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B–63014EN/02 POSITION SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key POS POS Absolute coordinate display [ABS] [(OPRT)] [PTSPRE] [EXEC] [RUNPRE] [EXEC] [WORK] [ALLEXE] (Axis name) [EXEC] Relative coordinate display [REL] [(OPRT)] (Axis or numeral) [PRESET]
  • Page 571B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES Soft key transition triggered by the function key PROG PROGRAM SCREEN in the MEM mode 1/2 PROG Program display screen [PRGRM] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed” (O number) [O SRH] (1) (N number) [N SRH] [REWIND] [P TYPE] [Q TYP
  • Page 5722. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B–63014EN/02 2/2 (2) [FL.SDL] [PRGRM] Return to (1) (Program display) File directory display screen [DIR] [(OPRT)] [SELECT] (number) [F SET] [EXEC] Schedule operation display screen [SCHDUL] [(OPRT)] [CLEAR] [CAN] [EXEC] (Schedule data) [INPUT] 552
  • Page 573B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES Soft key transition triggered by the function key PROG PROGRAM SCREEN in the EDIT mode 1/2 PROG Program display [PRGRM] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See"When the soft key [BG-EDT] is pressed" (O number) [O SRH] (Address) [SRH↓] (Address) [SRH↑] [REWIND] [F SRH] [CA
  • Page 5742. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B–63014EN/02 2/2 (1) Program directory display [LIB] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See"When the soft key [BG-EDT] is pressed" (O number) [O SRH] Return to the program [READ] [CHAIN] [STOP] [CAN] (O number) [EXEC] [PUNCH] [STOP] [CAN] (O number) [EXEC] Graphic Conversational Prog
  • Page 575B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES Soft key transition triggered by the function key PROG PROGRAM SCREEN in the MDI mode PROG Program display [PRGRM] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed” Program input screen [MDI] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT]
  • Page 5762. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B–63014EN/02 Soft key transition triggered by the function key PROG PROGRAM SCREEN in the HNDL, JOG, or REF mode PROG Program display [PRGRM] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed” Current block display screen [CURRNT] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “Wh
  • Page 577B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES PROGRAM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key PROG (When the soft key [BG-EDT] is pressed in all modes) 1/2 PROG Program display [PRGRM] [(OPRT)] [BG–END] (O number) [O SRH] (Address) [SRH↓] (Address) [SRH↑] [REWIND] [F SRH] [CAN] (N n
  • Page 5782. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B–63014EN/02 2/2 (1) Program directory display [LIB] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] (O number) [O SRH] Return to the program [READ] [CHAIN] [STOP] [CAN] (O number) [EXEC] [PUNCH] [STOP] [CAN] (O number) [EXEC] Graphic Conversational Programming [C.A.P.] [PRGRM] Return to the prog
  • Page 579B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OFFSET OFFSET/SETTING SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key SETTING 1/2 OFFSET SETTING Tool offset screen [OFFSET] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH] (Axis name) [INP.C.] (Numeral) [+INPUT] (Numeral) [INPUT] [CLEAR] [ALL] [WEAR] [GEOM] [READ]
  • Page 5802. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B–63014EN/02 2/2 (1) Menu programming screen [MENU] [(OPRT)] (Number) [SELECT] Software operator’s panel screen [OPR] Tool life management setting screen [TOOLLF] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH] [CLEAR] [CAN] [EXEC] (Numeral) [INPUT] 560
  • Page 581B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES SYSTEM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key SYSTEM 1/2 SYSTEM Parameter screen [PARAM] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH] [ON:1] [OFF:0] (Numeral) [+INPUT] (Numeral) [INPUT] [READ] [CAN] [EXEC] [PUNCH] [CAN] Note) Search for the start of the
  • Page 5822. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B–63014EN/02 (4) 2/2 Pitch error compensation screen [PITCH] [(OPRT)] (No.) [NO SRH] [ON:1] [OFF:0] (Numeral) [+INPUT] (Numeral) [INPUT] [READ] [CAN] [EXEC] [PUNCH] [CAN] Note) Search for the start of the file using [EXEC] the PRGRM screen for read/punch. Servo param
  • Page 583B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES MESSAGE SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key MESSAGE MESSAGE Alarm display screen [ALARM] Message display screen [MSG] Alarm history screen [HISTRY] [(OPRT)] [CLEAR] HELP SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key HELP H
  • Page 5842. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B–63014EN/02 GRAPHIC SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key GRAPH Tool path graphics GRAPH Tool path graphics [PARAM] [EXEC] [(OPRT)] [AUTO] [STSRT] [STOP] [REWIND] [CLEAR] [ZOOM] [(OPRT)] [EXEC] [←] [→] [POS] [↑] [↓] Solid graphics GRAPH Solid grap
  • Page 585B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES 2.3.4 When an address and a numerical key are pressed, the character Key Input and Input corresponding to that key is input once into the key input buffer. The contents of the key input buffer is displayed at the bottom of the CRT Buffer screen. In order
  • Page 5862. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B–63014EN/02 2.3.5 After a character or number has been input from the MDI panel, a data Warning Messages check is executed when INPUT key or a soft key is pressed. In the case of incorrect input data or the wrong operation a flashing warning message will be displaye
  • Page 587B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES 2.3.6 There are 12 soft keys in the 10.4″LCD/MDI or 9.5″LCD/MDI. As Soft Key Configuration illustrated below, the 5 soft keys on the right and those on the right and left edges operate in the same way as the 7.2″LCD or 8.4″ LCD, whereas the 5 keys on the
  • Page 5882. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B–63014EN/02 2.4 External input/output devices such as FANUC Handy File and so forth are available. For details on the devices, refer to the manuals listed below. EXTERNAL I/O Table 2.4 (a) External I/O device DEVICES Max. Reference Device name Usage storage manual c
  • Page 589B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES Parameter Before an external input/output device can be used, parameters must be set as follows. CNC MAIN CPU BOARD OPTION–1 BOARD Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 JD5A JD5B JD5C JD6A RS–232–C RS–232–C RS–232–C RS–422 Reader/ Reader/ Host Host puncher punch
  • Page 5902. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B–63014EN/02 2.4.1 The Handy File is an easy–to–use, multi function floppy disk FANUC Handy File input/output device designed for FA equipment. By operating the Handy File directly or remotely from a unit connected to the Handy File, programs can be transferred and e
  • Page 591B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES 2.5 POWER ON/OFF 2.5.1 Turning on the Power Procedure of turning on the power Procedure 1 Check that the appearance of the CNC machine tool is normal. (For example, check that front door and rear door are closed.) 2 Turn on the power according to the man
  • Page 5922. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B–63014EN/02 2.5.2 If a hardware failure or installation error occurs, the system displays one Screen Displayed at of the following three types of screens then stops. Information such as the type of printed circuit board installed in each slot Power–on is indicated.
  • Page 593B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES Screen indicating module setting status B0F1 – 01 SLOT 01 (3046) : END END: Setting completed SLOT 02 (3050) : Blank: Setting not completed Module ID Slot number Display of software configuration B0F1 – 01 CNC control software SERVO : 9090–01 Digital ser
  • Page 5943. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 3 MANUAL OPERATION MANUAL OPERATION are six kinds as follows : 3.1 Manual reference position return 3.2 Jog feed 3.3 Incremental feed 3.4 Manual handle feed 3.5 Manual absolute on/off 3.6 Tool axis direction handle feed/Tool axis direction handle feed B 574
  • Page 595B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 3. MANUAL OPERATION 3.1 The tool is returned to the reference position as follows : The tool is moved in the direction specified in parameter ZMI (bit 5 of No. MANUAL 1006) for each axis with the reference position return switch on the REFERENCE machine operator’s panel. The t
  • Page 5963. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 Explanations D Automatically setting the Bit 0 (ZPR) of parameter No. 1201 is used for automatically setting the coordinate system coordinate system. When ZPR is set, the coordinate system is automatically determined when manual reference position return is
  • Page 597B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 3. MANUAL OPERATION 3.2 In the jog mode, pressing a feed axis and direction selection switch on the JOG FEED machine operator’s panel continuously moves the tool along the selected axis in the selected direction. The jog feedrate is specified in a parameter (No.1423) The jog f
  • Page 5983. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 Limitations D Acceleration/decelera- Feedrate, time constant and method of automatic acceleration/ tion for rapid traverse deceleration for manual rapid traverse are the same as G00 in programmed command. D Change of modes Changing the mode to the jog mode
  • Page 599B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 3. MANUAL OPERATION 3.3 In the incremental (INC) mode, pressing a feed axis and direction selection switch on the machine operator’s panel moves the tool one step INCREMENTAL FEED along the selected axis in the selected direction. The minimum distance the tool is moved is the
  • Page 6003. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 3.4 In the handle mode, the tool can be minutely moved by rotating the manual pulse generator on the machine operator’s panel. Select the axis MANUAL HANDLE along which the tool is to be moved with the handle feed axis selection FEED switches. The minimum d
  • Page 601B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 3. MANUAL OPERATION Explanations D Availability of manual Parameter JHD (bit 0 of No. 7100) enables or disables the manual handle pulse generator in Jog feed in the JOG mode. mode (JHD) When the parameter JHD( bit 0 of No. 7100) is set 1,both manual handle feed and incremental
  • Page 6023. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 WARNING Rotating the handle quickly with a large magnification such as x100 moves the tool too fast. The feedrate is clamped at the rapid traverse feedrate. NOTE Rotate the manual pulse generator at a rate of five rotations per second or lower. If the manua
  • Page 603B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 3. MANUAL OPERATION 3.5 Whether the distance the tool is moved by manual operation is added to the coordinates can be selected by turning the manual absolute switch on MANUAL ABSOLUTE or off on the machine operator’s panel. When the switch is turned on, the ON AND OFF distance
  • Page 6043. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 Explanation The following describes the relation between manual operation and coordinates when the manual absolute switch is turned on or off, using a program example. G01G90 X100.0Y100.0F010 ;  X200.0Y150.0 ;  X300.0Y200.0 ;  The subsequent figures use
  • Page 605B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 3. MANUAL OPERATION D When reset after a Coordinates when the feed hold button is pressed while block  is being manual operation executed, manual operation (Y–axis +75.0) is performed, the control unit following a feed hold is reset with the RESET button, and block  is read
  • Page 6063. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 When the switch is ON during cutter compensation Operation of the machine upon return to automatic operation after manual intervention with the switch is ON during execution with an absolute command program in the cutter compensation mode will be described.
  • Page 607B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 3. MANUAL OPERATION Manual operation during cornering This is an example when manual operation is performed during cornering. VA2’, VB1’, and VB2’ are vectors moved in parallel with VA2, VB1 and VB2 by the amount of manual movement. The new vectors are calculated from VC1 and
  • Page 6083. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 3.6 Tool axis direction handle feed moves the tool over a specified distance by handle feed in the direction of the tool axis tilted by the rotation of the TOOL AXIS rotary axis. DIRECTION HANDLE FEED/TOOL AXIS Tool axis direction handle feed B has the func
  • Page 609B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 3. MANUAL OPERATION Explanations D Axis configuration Assume that the rotary axes for basic axes X, Y, and Z are A, B, and C, respectively. Assume also that the Z–axis represents the tool axis. Depending on the axis configuration of the machine, four types of tool axis directi
  • Page 6103. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 (2) B–C axis type Z Xp = Hp sin (b) cos (c) Yp = Hp sin (b) sin (c) Zp = Hp cos (b) b Zp Hp X b C Yp Y Xp Hpxy (3) A–B axis (A axis master) type Xp = Hp sin (b) Z Yp = –Hp cos (b) sin (a) Zp = Hp cos (b) cos (a) a Zp b Yp Y X Xp (4)A–B axis (B axis master)
  • Page 611B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 3. MANUAL OPERATION In the figures above, a, b, and c represent the positions (angles) of the A–axis, B–axis, and C–axis from the machine zero point; those values present when the tool axis direction handle feed mode is set or a reset occurs are used. To change the feed direct
  • Page 6123. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 Tool Axis Direction Handle Feed Procedure 1 Select the HANDLE switch from the mode selection switches. MODE 2 Select the tool axis normal direction handle feed switch. MEMORY REMOTE MDI 3 Select the tool axis direction handle feed mode axis as the handle fe
  • Page 613B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 3. MANUAL OPERATION D Pulse distribution to The figure below shows handle pulse (Hp) distribution to the X–axis, basic axes Y–axis, and Z–axis for each of the four directions. (1) A–C axis type (X–axis direction) Xp = Hp COS (C) Yp = Hp SIN (C) Zp = 0 0 Y C The XY plane is dra
  • Page 6143. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 (3) B–C axis type (X–axis direction) Xp = Hp COS (B) COS (C) Yp = Hp COS (B) SIN (C) Zp = –Hp SIN (B) Z Xp 0’ Zp Hp X (X direction) B C X’ C Yp 0 Hpxy Y (4) B–C axis type (Y–axis direction) Xp = –Hp SIN (C) Yp = Hp COS (C) Zp = 0 X 0 C The XY plane is drawn
  • Page 615B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 3. MANUAL OPERATION D Setting basic axes and Basic axes X, Y, and Z are determined by parameter No. 1022 (plane rotary axes selection). Rotary axes A, B, and C are determined by parameter No. 1020 (axis name). D Tool axis direction The direction of the tool X axis is determine
  • Page 6163. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 3.7 In manual handle feed or jog feed, the following types of feed operations are enabled in addition to the conventional feed operation along a MANUAL specified single axis (X–axis, Y–axis, Z–axis, and so forth) based on LINEAR/CIRCULAR simultaneous 1–axis
  • Page 617B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 3. MANUAL OPERATION For jog feed The feedrate can be overridden using the manual feedrate override dial. The procedure above is just an example. For actual operations, refer to the relevant manual provided by the machine tool builder. Explanations D Definition of a straight Fo
  • Page 6183. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 (2) Linear feed (simultaneous 2–axis control) By turning a manual handle, the tool can be moved along the straight line parallel to a specified straight line on a simultaneous 2–axis control basis. This manual handle is referred to as the guidance handle. M
  • Page 619B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 3. MANUAL OPERATION D Feedrate for manual Feedrate handle feed The feedrate depends on the speed at which a manual handle is turned. A distance to be traveled by the tool (along a tangent in the case of linear or circular feed) when a manual handle is turned by one pulse can b
  • Page 6203. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 D Manual handle feed in Even in JOG mode, manual handle feed can be enabled using bit 0 (JHD) JOG mode of parameter No. 7100. In this case, however, manual handle feed is enabled only when the tool is not moved along any axis by jog feed. Limitations D Mirr
  • Page 621B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 3. MANUAL OPERATION 3.8 For execution of rigid tapping, set rigid mode, then switch to handle mode and move the tapping axis with a manual handle. For more information MANUAL RIGID about rigid tapping, see Section II–14.2 and refer to the relevant manual TAPPING provided by th
  • Page 6223. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 Explanations D Manual rigid tapping Manual rigid tapping is enabled by setting bit 0 (HRG) of parameter No. 5203 to 1. D Cancellation of rigid To cancel rigid mode, specify G80 as same the normal rigid tapping. mode When the reset key is pressed, rigid mode
  • Page 623B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 3. MANUAL OPERATION 3.9 The manual numeric command function allows data programmed through the MDI to be executed in jog mode. Whenever the system is MANUAL NUMERIC ready for jog feed, a manual numeric command can be executed. The COMMAND following eight functions are supporte
  • Page 6243. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 Example 2: When the maximum number of controlled axes is 7 or 8 PROGRAM (JOG) O0010 N00020 G00 P (ABSOLUTE) (DISTANCE TO GO) X X 0.000 X 0.000 Y Y 0.000 Y 0.000 Z Z 0.000 Z 0.000 U U 0.000 U 0.000 V V 0.000 V 0.000 W W 0.000 W 0.000 A A 0.000 A 0.000 C C 0.
  • Page 625B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 3. MANUAL OPERATION NOTE When an alarm state exists, data cannot be set. 5 Press the cycle start switch on the machine operator’s panel to start command execution. The status is indicated as ”MSTR.” (When the 9” screen is being used, the actual feedrate ”ACT.F” and spindle spe
  • Page 6263. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 NOTE When the manual rapid traverse selection switch is set to the OFF position, the jog feedrate for each axis is clamped such that a parameter–set feedrate, determined by bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No. 1401 as shown below, is not exceeded. LRP = 0: Manual r
  • Page 627B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 3. MANUAL OPERATION D 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference The tool returns directly to the 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference position without position return (G30) passing through any intermediate points, regardless of the specified amount of travel. To select a reference position, specify P2
  • Page 6283. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 D B codes (second After address B, specify a numeric value of no more than the number of auxiliary functions) digits specified by parameter No. 3033. NOTE 1 B codes can be renamed ”U,” ”V,” ”W,” ”A,” or ”C” by setting parameter No. 3460. If the new name is
  • Page 629B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 3. MANUAL OPERATION D Erasing data (1) When soft key [CLEAR] is pressed, followed by soft key [EXEC], all the set data is cleared. In this case, however, the G codes are set to G00 or G01, depending on the setting of bit 0 (G01) of parameter No. 3402. Data can also be cleared
  • Page 6303. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 D REF mode The manual numeric command screen appears even when the mode is changed to REF mode. If, however, an attempt is made to set and execute data, a ”WRONG MODE” warning is output and the attempt fails. D Indexing of the index Commands cannot be speci
  • Page 631B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 4 AUTOMATIC OPERATION Programmed operation of a CNC machine tool is referred to as automatic operation. This chapter explains the following types of automatic operation: • MEMORY OPERATION Operation by executing a program registered in CNC memory • MDI O
  • Page 6324. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 4.1 Programs are registered in memory in advance. When one of these programs is selected and the cycle start switch on the machine operator’s MEMORY panel is pressed, automatic operation starts, and the cycle start LED goes OPERATION on. When the feed ho
  • Page 633B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION b. Terminating memory operation Press the RESET key on the MDI panel. Automatic operation is terminated and the reset state is entered. When a reset is applied during movement, movement decelerates then stops. Explanation Memory operation After memory op
  • Page 6344. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 D Optional block skip When the optional block skip switch on the machine operator’s panel is turned on, blocks containing a slash (/) are ignored. D Cycle start for the For the two–path control, a cycle start switch is provided for each tool two–path con
  • Page 635B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 4.2 In the MDI mode, a program consisting of up to 10 lines can be created in the same format as normal programs and executed from the MDI panel. MDI OPERATION MDI operation is used for simple test operations. The following procedure is given as an examp
  • Page 6364. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 5 To execute a program, set the cursor on the head of the program. (Start from an intermediate point is possible.) Push Cycle Start button on the operator’s panel. By this action, the prepared program will start. (For the two–path control, select the too
  • Page 637B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Explanation The previous explanation of how to execute and stop memory operation also applies to MDI operation, except that in MDI operation, M30 does not return control to the beginning of the program (M99 performs this function). D Erasing the program
  • Page 6384. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 D Macro call When the custom macro option is provided, macro programs can also be created, called, and executed in the MDI mode. However, macro call commands cannot be executed when the mode is changed to MDI mode after memory operation is stopped during
  • Page 639B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 4.3 By activating automatic operation during the DNC operation mode (RMT), it is possible to perform machining (DNC operation) while a DNC OPERATION program is being read in via reader/puncher interface, or remote buffer. If the floppy cassette directory
  • Page 6404. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 D Program screen PROGRAM O0001 N00020 (7.2″/8.4″LCD) N020 X100.0 Z100.0 (DNC–PROG) ; N030 X200.0 Z200.0 ; N040 X300.0 Z300.0 ; N050 X400.0 Z400.0 ; N060 X500.0 Z500.0 ; N070 X600.0 Z600.0 ; N080 X700.0 Z400.0 ; N090 X800.0 Z400.0 ; N100 x900.0 z400.0 ; N
  • Page 641B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Limitations D Limit on number of In program display, no more than 256 characters can be displayed. characters Accordingly, character display may be truncated in the middle of a block. D M198 (command for In DNC operation, M198 cannot be executed. If M198
  • Page 6424. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 4.4 While an automation operation is being performed, a program input from an I/O device connected to the reader/punch interface can be executed and SIMULTANEOUS output through the reader/punch interface at the same time. INPUT/OUTPUT Simultaneous Input/
  • Page 643B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Limitations D M198 (command for M198 cannot be executed in the input, output and run simultaneous mode. calling a program from An attempt to do so results in alarm No. 210. within an external input/output unit) D Macro control command A macro control com
  • Page 6444. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 4.5 This function specifies Sequence No. of a block to be restarted when a tool PROGRAM RESTART is broken down or when it is desired to restart machining operation after a day off, and restarts the machining operation from that block. It can also be used
  • Page 645B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Procedure for Program Restart by Specifying a Sequence Number Procedure 1 [ P TYPE ] 1 Retract the tool and replace it with a new one. When necessary, change the offset. (Go to step 2.) [ Q TYPE ] 1 When power is turned ON or emergency stop is released,
  • Page 6464. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 5 The sequence number is searched for, and the program restart screen appears on the CRT display. PROGRAM RESTART O0002 N01000 DESTINATION M 1 2 X 57. 096 1 2 Y 56. 877 1 2 Z 56. 943 1 2 1 2 1 ******** DISTANCE TO GO ******** ******** 1 X 1. 459 T*******
  • Page 647B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Procedure for Program Restart by Specifying a Block Number Procedure 1 [ P TYPE ] 1 Retract the tool and replace it with a new one. When necessary, change the offset. (Go to step 2.) [ Q TYPE ] 1 When power is turned ON or emergency stop is released, per
  • Page 6484. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 The coordinates and amount of travel for restarting the program can be displayed for up to five axes. If your system supports six or more axes, pressing the [RSTR] soft key again displays the data for the sixth and subsequent axes. (The program restart s
  • Page 649B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION < Example 2 > CNC Program Number of blocks O 0001 ; 1 G90 G92 X0 Y0 Z0 ; 2 G90 G00 Z100. ; 3 G81 X100. Y0. Z–120. R–80. F50. ; 4 #1 = #1 + 1 ; 4 #2 = #2 + 1 ; 4 #3 = #3 + 1 ; 4 G00 X0 Z0 ; 5 M30 ; 6 Macro statements are not counted as blocks. D Storing /
  • Page 6504. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 D Single block When single block operation is ON during movement to the restart position, operation stops every time the tool completes movement along an axis. When operation is stopped in the single block mode, MDI intervention cannot be performed. D Ma
  • Page 651B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 4.6 The schedule function allows the operator to select files (programs) SCHEDULING registered on a floppy–disk in an external input/output device (Handy FUNCTION File, Floppy Cassette, or FA Card) and specify the execution order and number of repetition
  • Page 6524. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 Procedure for Scheduling Function Procedure D Procedure for executing 1 Press the MEMORY switch on the machine operator’s panel, then one file press the PROG function key on the MDI panel. 2 Press the rightmost soft key (continuous menu key), then press
  • Page 653B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 4 Press the REMOTE switch on the machine operator’s panel to enter the RMT mode, then press the cycle start switch. The selected file is executed. For details on the REMOTE switch, refer to the manual supplied by the machine tool builder. The selected fi
  • Page 6544. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 Move the cursor and enter the file numbers and number of repetitions in the order in which to execute the files. At this time, the current number of repetitions “CUR.REP” is 0. 5 Press the REMOTE switch on the machine operator’s panel to enter the RMT mo
  • Page 655B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION D Displaying the floppy During the execution of file, the floppy directory display of background disk directory during file editing cannot be referenced. execution D Restarting automatic To resume automatic operation after it is suspended for scheduled o
  • Page 6564. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 4.7 The subprogram call function is provided to call and execute subprogram SUBPROGRAM CALL files stored in an external input/output device(Handy File, FLOPPY FUNCTION (M198) CASSETTE, FA Card)during memory operation. When the following block in a progra
  • Page 657B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Restrictions D Subprogram call For the two–path control, subprograms in a floppy cassette cannot be function with two–path called for the two tool posts at the same time. control NOTE 1 When M198 in the program of the file saved in a floppy cassette is e
  • Page 6584. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 4.8 The movement by manual handle operation can be done by overlapping MANUAL HANDLE it with the movement by automatic operation in the automatic operation INTERRUPTION mode. Tool position during Z automatic operation Tool position after handle interrupt
  • Page 659B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Explanations D Relation with other The following table indicates the relation between other functions and the functions movement by handle interrupt. Display Relation Machine lock Machine lock is effective. The tool does not move even when this signal tu
  • Page 6604. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 (a) INPUT UNIT : Handle interrupt move amount in input unit system Indicates the travel distance specified by handle interruption according to the least input increment. (b) OUTPUT UNI : Handle interrupt move amount in output unit system Indicates the tr
  • Page 661B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 4.9 During automatic operation, the mirror image function can be used for MIRROR IMAGE movement along an axis. To use this function, set the mirror image switch to ON on the machine operator’s panel, or set the mirror image setting to ON from the MDI pan
  • Page 6624. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 2–4 Move the cursor to the mirror image setting position, then set the target axis to 1. 3 Enter an automatic operation mode (memory mode or MDI mode), then press the cycle start button to start automatic operation. Explanations D The mirror image functi
  • Page 663B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 4.10 The tool can be withdrawn from a workpiece in order to replace the tool when it is damaged during machining, or merely to check the status of TOOL WITHDRAWAL machining. The tool can then be advanced again to restart machining AND RETURN efficiently.
  • Page 6644. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 Procedure2 Suppose that the TOOL WITHDRAW switch on the machine operator’s Retract panel is turned on when the tool is positioned at point A during execution of the N30 block. Machine operator’s panel TOOL RETRAC- BEING TION WITH- POSITION DRAWN A TOOL T
  • Page 665B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Procedure3 Set the manual operation mode, then withdraw the tool. For manual Withdrawal operation, either jog feed or handle feed is possible. 11 12 10 9 8 3 4 7 2 5 6 Z E point 1 A point X Y 645
  • Page 6664. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 Procedure4 After withdrawing the tool and any additional operation such as replacing Return the tool, move the tool back to the previous retraction position. To return the tool to the retraction position, return the mode to automatic operation mode, then
  • Page 667B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Procedure 5 While the tool is at the retraction position (point E in the figure below) Repositioning and the RETRACTION POSITION LED is on, press the cycle start switch. The tool is then repositioned at the point where retraction was started (i.e. where
  • Page 6684. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 Explanation 2 Withdrawal D Axis selection To move the tool along an axis, select the corresponding axis selection signal. Never specify axis selection signals for two or more axes at a time. D Path memorization When the tool is moved in manual operation
  • Page 669B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 4.11 With the retrace function, the tool can be moved in the reverse direction (reverse movement) by using the REVERSE switch during automatic RETRACE FUNCTION operation to trace the programmed path. The retrace function also enables the user to move the
  • Page 6704. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 Feed hold stop REVERSE switch rurned on cycle start Cycle start (forward movement started) Forward movement Reverse movement Reverse movement started D Reverse movement → Three methods are available for moving the tool in the forward direction Forward re
  • Page 671B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Cycle start (forward movement started) Reverse movement Feed hold stop started REVERSE switch turned off Forward movement Cycle start Reverse movement Forward return Forward return movement started movement D Reverse movement → When there are no more blo
  • Page 6724. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 Feed hold stop Cycle start Reverse movement (forward movement started) signal=1,cycle start Reverse movement started Forward movement started Forward return movement started Forward movement Reverse movement Forward return movement Explanations D Forward
  • Page 673B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION D Reset Upon reset (when the RESET key on the MDI panel is pressed, the external reset signal is applied, or the reset and rewind signal is applied), the memorized reverse movement blocks are cleared. D Feedrate A feedrate for reverse movement can be spe
  • Page 6744. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 D Circular Be sure to specify the radius of an arc with R. interpolation(G02,G03) WARNING If an end point is not correctly placed on an arc (if a leading line is produced) when an arc center is specified using I, J, and K, the tool does not perform corre
  • Page 675B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION D Skip funtion (G31), In reverse movement and forward return movement, the skip signal and automatic tool length automatic tool length measurement signal are ignored. In reverse measurement (G37) movement and forward return movement, the tool moves along
  • Page 6764. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 D Auxiliary function The M, S, and T functions, and secondary auxiliary functions (B functions) are output directly in reverse movement and forward return movement. When an M, S, or T function, or secondary auxiliary function (B function) is specified in
  • Page 677B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 4.12 In cases such as when tool movement along an axis is stopped by feed hold during automatic operation so that manual intervention can be used to MANUAL replace the tool: When automatic operation is restarted, this function INTERVENTION AND returns th
  • Page 6784. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 Example 1. The N1 block cuts a workpiece Tool N2 Block start point N1 2. The tool is stopped by pressing the feed hold switch in the middle of the N1 block (point A). N2 N1 Point A 3. After retracting the tool manually to point B, tool movement is restar
  • Page 679B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 4.13 DNC OPERATION WITH MEMORY CARD 4.13.1 “DNC operation with Memory Card” is a function that it is possible to Specification perform machining with executing the program in the memory card, which is assembled to the memory card interface, where is the
  • Page 6804. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 NOTE 1 To use this function, it is necessary to set the parameter of No.20 to 4 by setting screen. No.20 [I/O CHANEL: Setting to select an input/output unit] Setting value is 4.: It means using the memory card interface. 2 When CNC control unit is a stan
  • Page 681B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 4.13.2.2 When the following block in a program in CNC memory is executed, a Subprogram Call (M198) subprogram file in memory card is called. Format 1. Normal format M198 Pffff ∆∆∆∆ ; File number for a file in the memory card Number of repetition Memory c
  • Page 6824. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 4.13.3 (1) The memory card can not be accessed, such as display of memory card Limitation and Notes list and so on, during the DNC operation with memory card. (2) It is possible to execute the DNC operation with memory card on multi path system. However,
  • Page 683B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 4.13.5 FS16i–TA B1F2–04 or later Applied Software FS18i–TA BEF2–04 or later 4.13.6 Connecting PCMCIA Card Attachment 4.13.6.1 Specification Number Specification Remarks A02B–0236–K160 For 7.2″ LCD or 8.4″ LCD A02B–0236–K161 For 9.5″ LCD or 10.4″ LCD 4.13
  • Page 6844. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 2) How to mount the card (a) Insert the card to slit of the attachment. Please pay attention to the direction of the card. (Please mach the direction of ditch on the card.) (b) Push up the card to the upper end of the attachment. 3) Assembling of the att
  • Page 685B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 4) Appearance after connection NOTE 1 In both case of stand–alone type i series and LCD mounted type i series, the memory card interface where is the left side of the screen of the display unit. (The memory card interface on the stand–alone type controll
  • Page 6865. TEST OPERATION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 5 TEST OPERATION The following functions are used to check before actual machining whether the machine operates as specified by the created program. 5.1 Machine Lock and Auxiliary Function Lock 5.2 Feedrate Override 5.3 Rapid Traverse Override 5.4 Dry Run 5.5
  • Page 687B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 5. TEST OPERATION 5.1 To display the change in the position without moving the tool, use machine lock. MACHINE LOCK AND There are two types of machine lock: all–axis machine lock, which stops AUXILIARY the movement along all axes, and specified–axis machine lock, which FUNCTIO
  • Page 6885. TEST OPERATION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 Restrictions D M, S, T, B command by M, S, T and B commands are executed in the machine lock state. only machine lock D Reference position When a G27, G28, or G30 command is issued in the machine lock state, return under Machine the command is accepted but th
  • Page 689B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 5. TEST OPERATION 5.2 A programmed feedrate can be reduced or increased by a percentage (%) selected by the override dial.This feature is used to check a program. FEEDRATE For example, when a feedrate of 100 mm/min is specified in the program, OVERRIDE setting the override dia
  • Page 6905. TEST OPERATION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 5.3 An override of four steps (F0, 25%, 50%, and 100%) can be applied to the rapid traverse rate. F0 is set by a parameter (No. 1421). RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE ÇÇ ÇÇ ÇÇ ÇÇ ÇÇ Rapid traverse Override ÇÇ 5m/min rate10m/min 50% Fig. 5.3 Rapid traverse override Ra
  • Page 691B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 5. TEST OPERATION 5.4 The tool is moved at the feedrate specified by a parameter regardless of the feedrate specified in the program. This function is used for checking DRY RUN the movement of the tool under the state taht the workpiece is removed from the table. Tool Table Fi
  • Page 6925. TEST OPERATION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 5.5 Pressing the single block switch starts the single block mode. When the cycle start button is pressed in the single block mode, the tool stops after SINGLE BLOCK a single block in the program is executed. Check the program in the single block mode by exec
  • Page 693B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 5. TEST OPERATION Explanation D Reference position If G28 to G30 are issued, the single block function is effective at the return and single block intermediate point. D Single block during a In a canned cycle, the single block stop points are the end of , , and canned cycle
  • Page 6946. SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B–63014EN/02 6 SAFETY FUNCTIONS To immediately stop the machine for safety, press the Emergency stop button. To prevent the tool from exceeding the stroke ends, Overtravel check and Stroke check are available. This chapter describes emergency stop., overtravel check, an
  • Page 695B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS 6.1 If you press Emergency Stop button on the machine operator’s panel, the machine movement stops in a moment. EMERGENCY STOP Red EMERGENCY STOP Fig. 6.1 Emergency stop This button is locked when it is pressed. Although it varies with the machine tool buil
  • Page 6966. SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B–63014EN/02 6.2 When the tool tries to move beyond the stroke end set by the machine tool limit switch, the tool decelerates and stops because of working the limit OVERTRAVEL switch and an OVER TRAVEL is displayed. Deceleration and stop Y X Stroke end Limit switch Fig.
  • Page 697B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS 6.3 Three areas which the tool cannot enter can be specified with stored stroke check 1, stored stroke check 2, and stored stroke check 3. STORED STROKE CHECK ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ Ç (X,Y,Z) ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ (I,J,K) ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ (1)For
  • Page 6986. SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B–63014EN/02 G 22X_Y_Z_I_J_K_; ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ (X,Y,Z) ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ (I,J,K) ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ X>I, Y>J, Z>K X–I >ζ (In least command increment) Y–J >ζ (In least command increment) Z–K >ζ ((In least command increment) F ζ (mm)= 7500 F=Rapid traverse speed (mm/min) Fig. 6.3 (b) Crea
  • Page 699B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS D Checkpoint for the Confirm the checking position (the top of the tool or the tool chuck) before forbidden area programming the forbidden area. If point A (The top of the tool) is checked in Fig. 6.3 (d) , the distance “a” should be set as the data for the
  • Page 7006. SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B–63014EN/02 D Releasing the alarms If the enters a forbidden area and an alarm is generated, the tool can be moved only in the backward direction. To cancel the alarm, move the tool backward until it is outside the forbidden area and reset the system. When the alarm is
  • Page 701B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS 6.4 During automatic operation, before the movement specified by a given block is started, whether the tool enters the inhibited area defined by STROKE LIMIT stored stroke limit 1, 2, or 3 is checked by determining the position of the CHECK PRIOR TO end poi
  • Page 7026. SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B–63014EN/02 Example 2) End point Inhibited area defined by stored stroke limit 1 or 2 a The tool is stopped at point a according Start point to stored stroke limit 1 or 2. Inhibited area defined by stored stroke limit 1 or 2 End point Immediately upon movement commenci
  • Page 703B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS D Cyrindrical interpolation In cylindrical interpolation mode, no check is made. mode D Polar coordinate In polar coordinate interpolation mode, no check is made. interpolation mode D Angular axis control When the angulalr axis control option is selected, n
  • Page 7047. ALARM AND SELF–DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS OPERATION B–63014EN/02 7 ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS When an alarm occurs, the corresponding alarm screen appears to indicate the cause of the alarm. The causes of alarms are classified by error codes. Up to 25 previous alarms can be stored and displayed
  • Page 7057. ALARM AND SELF–DIAGNOSIS B–63014EN/02 OPERATION FUNCTIONS 7.1 ALARM DISPLAY Explanations D Alarm screen When an alarm occurs, the alarm screen appears. ALARM MESSAGE 0000 00000 100 PARAMETER WRITE ENABLE 510 OVER TR1AVEL :+X 520 OVER TRAVEL :+2 530 OVER TRAVEL :+3 S 0 T0000 MDI **** *** *** ALM 1
  • Page 7067. ALARM AND SELF–DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS OPERATION B–63014EN/02 D Reset of the alarm Error codes and messages indicate the cause of an alarm. To recover from an alarm, eliminate the cause and press the reset key. D Error codes The error codes are classified as follows: No. 000 to 255 : P/S alarm (Progr
  • Page 7077. ALARM AND SELF–DIAGNOSIS B–63014EN/02 OPERATION FUNCTIONS 7.2 Up to 25 of the most recent CNC alarms are stored and displayed on the screen. ALARM HISTORY Display the alarm history as follows: DISPLAY Procedure for Alarm History Display Procedure 1 Press the function key MESSAGE . 2 Press the cha
  • Page 7087. ALARM AND SELF–DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS OPERATION B–63014EN/02 7.3 The system may sometimes seem to be at a halt, although no alarm has occurred. In this case, the system may be performing some processing. CHECKING BY The state of the system can be checked by displaying the self–diagnostic SELF–DIAGNO
  • Page 7097. ALARM AND SELF–DIAGNOSIS B–63014EN/02 OPERATION FUNCTIONS Explanations Diagnostic numbers 000 to 015 indicate states when a command is being specified but appears as if it were not being executed. The table below lists the internal states when 1 is displayed at the right end of each line on the s
  • Page 7107. ALARM AND SELF–DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS OPERATION B–63014EN/02 The table below shows the signals and states which are enabled when each diagnostic data item is 1. Each combination of the values of the diagnostic data indicates a unique state. 020 CUT SPEED UP/DOWN 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 021 RESET BUTTON ON 0 0
  • Page 711B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT 8 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT NC data is transferred between the NC and external input/output devices such as the Handy File. The following types of data can be entered and output : 1.Program 2.Offset data 3.Parameter 4.Pitch error compensation data 5.Custom macro c
  • Page 7128. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63014EN/02 8.1 Of the external input/output devices, the FANUC Handy File use floppy disks as their input/output medium. FILES In this manual, these input/output medium is generally referred to as a floppy. Unlike an NC tape, a floppy allows the user to freely choose
  • Page 713B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT D Protect switch The floppy is provided with the write protect switch. Set the switch to the write enable state. Then, start output operation. Write protect switch of a cassette (1) Write–protected (2) Write–enabled (Only reading is (Reading, writing, poss
  • Page 7148. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63014EN/02 8.2 When the program is input from the floppy, the file to be input first must be searched. FILE SEARCH For this purpose, proceed as follows: File 1 File 2 File 3 File n Blank File searching of the file n File heading Procedure 1 Press the EDIT or MEMORY s
  • Page 715B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT Alarm Alarm No. Description The ready signal (DR) of an input/output device is off. An alarm is not immediately indicated in the CNC even when an alarm occurs during head searching (when a file is not found, or 86 the like). An alarm is given when the inpu
  • Page 7168. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63014EN/02 8.3 Files stored on a floppy can be deleted file by file as required. FILE DELETION File deletion Procedure 1 Insert the floppy into the input/output device so that it is ready for writing. 2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 3 Press f
  • Page 717B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT 8.4 PROGRAM INPUT/OUTPUT 8.4.1 This section describes how to load a program into the CNC from a floppy or NC tape. Inputting a Program Inputting a program Procedure 1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading. For the two–path control, select the too
  • Page 7188. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63014EN/02 D Program numbers on a • When a program is entered without specifying a program number. NC tape ⋅ The O–number of the program on the NC tape is assigned to the program. If the program has no O–number, the N–number in the first block is assigned to the prog
  • Page 719B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT S Pressing the [CHAIN] soft key positions the cursor to the end of the registered program. Once a program has been input, the cursor is positioned to the start of the new program. S Additional input is possible only when a program has already been register
  • Page 7208. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63014EN/02 8.4.2 A program stored in the memory of the CNC unit is output to a floppy or Outputting a Program NC tape. Outputting a program Procedure 1 Make sure the output device is ready for output. For the two–path control, select the tool post for which a program
  • Page 721B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT D On the memo record Head searching with a file No. is necessary when a file output from the CNC to the floppy is again input to the CNC memory or compared with the content of the CNC memory. Therefore, immediately after a file is output from the CNC to th
  • Page 7228. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63014EN/02 8.5 OFFSET DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT 8.5.1 Offset data is loaded into the memory of the CNC from a floppy or NC Inputting Offset Data tape. The input format is the same as for offset value output. See III– 8.5.2. When an offset value is loaded which has the sa
  • Page 723B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT 8.5.2 All offset data is output in a output format from the memory of the CNC Outputting Offset Data to a floppy or NC tape. Outputting offset data Procedure 1 Make sure the output device is ready for output. For the two–path control, select the tool post
  • Page 7248. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63014EN/02 8.6 Parameters and pitch error compensation data are input and output from INPUTTING AND different screens, respectively. This chapter describes how to enter them. OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS AND PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION DATA 8.6.1 Parameters are loaded into the
  • Page 725B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT 15 Turn the power to the CNC back on. 16 Release the EMERGENCY STOP button on the machine operator’s panel. 8.6.2 All parameters are output in the defined format from the memory of the CNC to a floppy or NC tape. Outputting Parameters Outputting parameters
  • Page 7268. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63014EN/02 D Output file name When the floppy disk directory display function is used, the name of the output file is PARAMETER. Once all parameters have been output, the output file is named ALL PARAMETER. Once only parameters which are set to other than 0 have been
  • Page 727B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT 15 Turn the power to the CNC back on. 16 Release the EMERGENCY STOP button on the machine operator’s panel. Explanations D Pitch error Parameters 3620 to 3624 and pitch error compensation data must be set compensation correctly to apply pitch error compens
  • Page 7288. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63014EN/02 8.7 INPUTTING/ OUTPUTTING CUSTOM MACRO COMMON VARIABLES 8.7.1 The value of a custom macro common variable (#500 to #999) is loaded into the memory of the CNC from a floppy or NC tape. The same format Inputting Custom used to output custom macro common vari
  • Page 729B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT 8.7.2 Custom macro common variables (#500 to #999) stored in the memory Outputting Custom of the CNC can be output in the defined format to a floppy or NC tape. Macro Common Variable Outputting custom macro common variable Procedure 1 Make sure the output
  • Page 7308. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63014EN/02 8.8 On the floppy directory display screen, a directory of the FANUC Handy File, FANUC Floppy Cassette, or FANUC FA Card files can be displayed. DISPLAYING In addition, those files can be loaded, output, and deleted. DIRECTORY OF FLOPPY CASSETTE DIRECTORY
  • Page 731B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT 8.8.1 Displaying the Directory Displaying the directory of floppy cassette files Procedure 1 Use the following procedure to display a directory of all the files stored in a floppy: 1 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 2 Press function k
  • Page 7328. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63014EN/02 Procedure 2 Use the following procedure to display a directory of files starting with a specified file number : 1 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 2 Press function key PROG . 3 Press the rightmost soft key (next–menu key). 4 Press sof
  • Page 733B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT Explanations D Screen fields and their NO :Displays the file number meanings FILE NAME: Displays the file name. (METER) : Converts and prints out the file capacity to paper tape length.You can also produce H (FEET) I by setting the INPUT UNIT to INCH of th
  • Page 7348. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63014EN/02 8.8.2 The contents of the specified file number are read to the memory of NC. Reading Files Reading files Procedure 1 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. For the two–path control, select the tool post for which a file is to be input in m
  • Page 735B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT 8.8.3 Any program in the memory of the CNC unit can be output to a floppy Outputting Programs as a file. Outputting programs Procedure 1 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. For the two–path control, select the tool post for which a file
  • Page 7368. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63014EN/02 8.8.4 The file with the specified file number is deleted. Deleting Files Deleting files Procedure 1 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 2 Press function key PROG . 3 Press the rightmost soft key (next–menu key). 4 Press soft key [FLOPPY]
  • Page 737B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT Restrictions D Inputting file numbers If [F SET] or [O SET] is pressed without key inputting file number and and program numbers program number, file number or program number shows blank. When with keys 0 is entered for file numbers or program numbers, 1 i
  • Page 7388. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63014EN/02 8.9 CNC programs stored in memory can be grouped according to their names, thus enabling the output of CNC programs in group units. Section OUTPUTTING A III–11.3.3 explains the display of a program listing for a specified group. PROGRAM LIST FOR A SPECIFIE
  • Page 739B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT 8.10 To input/output a particular type of data, the corresponding screen is usually selected. For example, the parameter screen is used for parameter DATA INPUT/OUTPUT input from or output to an external input/output unit, while the program ON THE ALL IO s
  • Page 7408. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63014EN/02 8.10.1 Input/output–related parameters can be set on the ALL IO screen. Setting Parameters can be set, regardless of the mode. Input/Output–Related Parameters Setting input/output–related parameters Procedure 1 Press function key SYSTEM . 2 Press the right
  • Page 741B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT 8.10.2 A program can be input and output using the ALL IO screen. Inputting and When entering a program using a cassette or card, the user must specify the input file containing the program (file search). Outputting Programs File search Procedure 1 Press s
  • Page 7428. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63014EN/02 6 Press soft keys [F SRH] and [EXEC]. CAN EXEC The specified file is found. Explanations D Difference between N0 When a file already exists in a cassette or card, specifying N0 or N1 has and N1 the same effect. If N1 is specified when there is no file on t
  • Page 743B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT Inputting a program Procedure 1 Press soft key [PRGRM] on the ALL IO screen, described in Section 8.10.1. 2 Select EDIT mode. A program directory is displayed. 3 Press soft key [(OPRT)] . The screen and soft keys change as shown below. ⋅ A program director
  • Page 7448. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63014EN/02 Outputting programs Procedure 1 Press soft key [PRGRM] on the ALL IO screen, described in Section 8.10.1. 2 Select EDIT mode. A program directory is displayed. 3 Press soft key [(OPRT)] . The screen and soft keys change as shown below. ⋅ A program director
  • Page 745B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT Deleting files Procedure 1 Press soft key [PRGRM] on the ALL IO screen, described in Section 8.10.1. 2 Select EDIT mode. A program directory is displayed. 3 Press soft key [(OPRT)] . The screen and soft keys change as shown below. ⋅ A program directory is
  • Page 7468. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63014EN/02 8.10.3 Parameters can be input and output using the ALL IO screen. Inputting and Outputting Parameters Inputting parameters Procedure 1 Press soft key [PARAM] on the ALL IO screen, described in Section 8.10.1. 2 Select EDIT mode. 3 Press soft key [(OPRT)]
  • Page 747B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT Outputting parameters Procedure 1 Press soft key [PARAM] on the ALL IO screen, described in Section 8.10.1. 2 Select EDIT mode. 3 Press soft key [(OPRT)] . The screen and soft keys change as shown below. READ/PUNCH (PARAMETER) O1234 N12345 I/O CHANNEL 3 TV
  • Page 7488. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63014EN/02 8.10.4 Offset data can be input and output using the ALL IO screen. Inputting and Outputting Offset Data Inputting offset data Procedure 1 Press soft key [OFFSET] on the ALL IO screen, described in Section 8.10.1. 2 Select EDIT mode. 3 Press soft key [(OPR
  • Page 749B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT Outputting offset data Procedure 1 Press soft key [OFFSET] on the ALL IO screen, described in Section 8.10.1. 2 Select EDIT mode. 3 Press soft key [(OPRT)] . The screen and soft keys change as shown below. READ/PUNCH (OFFSET) O1234 N12345 I/O CHANNEL 3 TV
  • Page 7508. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63014EN/02 8.10.5 Custom macro common variables can be output using the ALL IO screen. Outputting Custom Macro Common Variables Outputting custom macro common variables Procedure 1 Press soft key [MACRO] on the ALL IO screen, described in Section 8.10.1. 2 Select EDI
  • Page 751B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT 8.10.6 The ALL IO screen supports the display of a directory of floppy files, as Inputting and well as the input and output of floppy files. Outputting Floppy Files Displaying a file directory Procedure 1 Press the rightmost soft key (next–menu key) on the
  • Page 7528. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63014EN/02 READ/PUNCH (FLOPPY) O1234 N12345 No. FILE NAME (Meter) VOL 0001 PARAMETER 46.1 0002 ALL.PROGRAM 12.3 0003 O0001 11.9 0004 O0002 11.9 0005 O0003 11.9 0006 O0004 0007 O0005 11.9 0008 O0010 11.9 0009 O0020 11.9 11.9 F SRH File No.=2 >2_ EDIT * * * * * * * ***
  • Page 753B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT Inputting a file Procedure 1 Press the rightmost soft key (next–menu key) on the ALL IO screen, described in Section 8.10.1. 2 Press soft key [FLOPPY] . 3 Select EDIT mode. The floppy screen is displayed. 4 Press soft key [(OPRT)] . The screen and soft key
  • Page 7548. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63014EN/02 Outputting a file Procedure 1 Press the rightmost soft key (next–menu key) on the ALL IO screen, described in Section 8.10.1. 2 Press soft key [FLOPPY] . 3 Select EDIT mode. The floppy screen is displayed. 4 Press soft key [(OPRT)] . The screen and soft ke
  • Page 755B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT Deleting a file Procedure 1 Press the rightmost soft key (next–menu key) on the ALL IO screen, described in Section 8.10.1. 2 Press soft key [FLOPPY] . 3 Select EDIT mode. The floppy screen is displayed. 4 Press soft key [(OPRT)] . The screen and soft keys
  • Page 7568. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63014EN/02 8.10.7 Data held in CNC memory can be saved to a memory card in MS–DOS Memory Card format. Data held on a memory card can be loaded into CNC memory. A save or load operation can be performed using soft keys while the CNC Input/Output is operating. Loading
  • Page 757B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT Saving memory data Data held in CNC memory can be saved to a memory card in MS–DOS format. Saving memory data Procedure 1 Press the rightmost soft key (next–menu key) on the ALL IO screen, described in Section 8.10.1. 2 Press soft key [M–CARD]. 3 Place the
  • Page 7588. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63014EN/02 Explanations D File name The file name used for save operation is determined by the amount of SRAM mounted in the CNC. A file holding saved data is divided into blocks of 512KB. HEAD1 SRAM file Amount of SRAM 256KB 0.5 MB 1.0 MB 2.5 MB Number of files 1 SR
  • Page 759B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT Loading Data into CNC memory data that has been saved to a memory card can be loaded Memory (Restoration) (restored) back into CNC memory. CNC memory data can be loaded in either of two ways. In the first method, all saved memory data is loaded. In the sec
  • Page 7608. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63014EN/02 9 During loading, the message ”RUNNING” blinks, and the number of bytes loaded is displayed in the message field. 10 Upon the completion of loading, the message ”COMPLETED” is displayed in the message field, with the message ”PRESS RESET KEY.” displayed on
  • Page 761B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT Memory card formatting Before a file can be saved to a memory card, the memory card must be formatted. Formatting a memory card Procedure 1 Press the rightmost soft key (next–menu key) on the ALL IO screen, described in Section 8.10.1. 2 Press soft key [M–
  • Page 7628. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63014EN/02 Deleting files Unnecessary saved files can be deleted from a memory card. Deleting files Procedure 1 Press the rightmost soft key (next–menu key) on the ALL IO screen, described in Section 8.10.1. 2 Press soft key [M–CARD]. 3 Place the CNC in the emergency
  • Page 763B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT Messages and restrictions Messages Message Description INSERT MEMORY CARD. No memory card is inserted. UNUSABLE MEMORY CARD The memory card does not contain device information. FORMAT MEMORY CARD. The memory card is not formatted. Format the memory card be
  • Page 7648. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63014EN/02 File system error codes Code Meaning 102 The memory card does not have sufficient free space. 105 No memory card is mounted. 106 A memory card is already mounted. 110 The specified directory cannot be found. 111 There are too many files under the root dire
  • Page 765B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT 8.11 By setting the I/O channel (parameter No. 20) to 4, files on a memory card can be referenced, and different types of data such as part programs, DATA INPUT/OUTPUT parameters, and offset data on a memory card can be input and output in USING A MEMORY t
  • Page 7668. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63014EN/02 Displaying a directory of stored files Procedure 1 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 2 Press function key PROG . 3 Press the rightmost soft key (next–menu key). 4 Press soft key [CARD]. The screen shown below is displayed. Using page k
  • Page 767B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT Searching for a file Procedure 1 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 2 Press function key PROG . 3 Press the rightmost soft key (next–menu key). 4 Press soft key [CARD]. The screen shown below is displayed. DIRECTORY (M–CARD) O0034 N0004
  • Page 7688. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63014EN/02 Reading a file Procedure 1 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 2 Press function key PROG. 3 Press the rightmost soft key (next–menu key). 4 Press soft key [CARD]. Then, the screen shown below is displayed. DIRECTORY (M–CARD) O0034 N00045
  • Page 769B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT 8 To specify a file with its file name, press soft key [N READ] in step 6 above. The screen shown below is displayed. DIRECTORY (M–CARD) O0001 N00010 No. FILE NAME COMMENT 0012 O0050 (MAIN PROGRAM) 0013 TESTPRO (SUB PROGRAM–1) 0014 O0060 (MACRO PROGRAM) ~
  • Page 7708. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63014EN/02 Writing a file Procedure 1 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 2 Press function key PROG . 3 Press the rightmost soft key (next–menu key). 4 Press soft key [CARD]. The screen shown below is displayed. DIRECTORY (M–CARD) O0034 N00045 No.
  • Page 771B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT Explanations D Registering the same file When a file having the same name is already registered in the memory name card, the existing file will be overwritten. D Writing all programs To write all programs, set program number = –9999. If no file name is spe
  • Page 7728. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63014EN/02 Deleting a file Procedure 1 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 2 Press function key PROG . 3 Press the rightmost soft key (next–menu key). 4 Press soft key [CARD]. The screen shown below is displayed. DIRECTORY (M–CARD) O0034 N00045 No.
  • Page 773B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT Batch input/output with a memory card On the ALL IO screen, different types of data including part programs, parameters, offset data, pitch error data, custom macros, and workpiece coordinate system data can be input and output using a memory card; the scr
  • Page 7748. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63014EN/02 Explanations D Each data item When this screen is displayed, the program data item is selected. The soft keys for other screens are displayed by pressing the rightmost soft key (next–menu key). Soft key [M–CARD] represents a separate memory card function f
  • Page 775B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT File format and error messages Format All files that are read from and written to a memory card are of text format. The format is described below. A file starts with % or LF, followed by the actual data. A file always ends with %. In a read operation, data
  • Page 7768. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63014EN/02 Memory Card Error Codes Code Meaning 102 The memory card does not have sufficient free space. 105 No memory card is mounted. 106 A memory card is already mounted. 110 The specified directory cannot be found. 111 There are too many files under the root dire
  • Page 777B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS 9 EDITING PROGRAMS General This chapter describes how to edit programs registered in the CNC. Editing includes the insertion, modification, deletion, and replacement of words. Editing also includes deletion of the entire program and automatic insertion of s
  • Page 7789. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B–63014EN/02 9.1 This section outlines the procedure for inserting, modifying, and deleting a word in a program registered in memory. INSERTING, ALTERING AND DELETING A WORD Procedure for inserting, altering and deleting a word 1 Select EDIT mode. 2 Press PROG . 3 Selec
  • Page 779B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS 9.1.1 A word can be searched for by merely moving the cursor through the text Word Search (scanning), by word search, or by address search. Procedure for scanning a program 1 Press the cursor key . The cursor moves forward word by word on the screen; the cu
  • Page 7809. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B–63014EN/02 Procedure for searching a word Example) of Searching for S12 PROGRAM O0050 N01234 N01234 is being O0050 ; searched for/ N01234 X100.0 Z1250.0 ; scanned currently. S12 ; S12 is searched N56789 M03 ; for. M02 ; % 1 Key in address S . 2 Key in 1 2 . ⋅ S12 cann
  • Page 781B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS 9.1.2 The cursor can be jumped to the top of a program. This function is called Heading a Program heading the program pointer. This section describes the three methods for heading the program pointer. Procedure for Heading a Program Method 1 1 Press RESET w
  • Page 7829. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B–63014EN/02 9.1.3 Inserting a Word Procedure for inserting a word 1 Search for or scan the word immediately before a word to be inserted. 2 Key in an address to be inserted. 3 Key in data. 4 Press the INSERT key. Example of Inserting T15 Procedure 1 Search for or scan
  • Page 783B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS 9.1.4 Altering a Word Procedure for altering a word 1 Search for or scan a word to be altered. 2 Key in an address to be inserted. 3 Key in data. 4 Press the ALTER key. Example of changing T15 to M15 Procedure 1 Search for or scan T15. Program O0050 N01234
  • Page 7849. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B–63014EN/02 9.1.5 Deleting a Word Procedure for deleting a word 1 Search for or scan a word to be deleted. 2 Press the DELETE key. Example of deleting X100.0 Procedure 1 Search for or scan X100.0. Program O0050 N01234 O0050 ; X100.0 is N01234 X100.0 Z1250.0 M15 ; searc
  • Page 785B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS 9.2 A block or blocks can be deleted in a program. DELETING BLOCKS 9.2.1 The procedure below deletes a block up to its EOB code; the cursor Deleting a Block advances to the address of the next word. Procedure for deleting a block 1 Search for or scan addres
  • Page 7869. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B–63014EN/02 9.2.2 The blocks from the currently displayed word to the block with a specified Deleting Multiple sequence number can be deleted. Blocks Procedure for deleting multiple blocks 1 Search for or scan a word in the first block of a portion to be deleted. 2 Key
  • Page 787B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS 9.3 When memory holds multiple programs, a program can be searched for. There are three methods as follows. PROGRAM NUMBER SEARCH Procedure for program number search Method 1 1 Select EDIT or MEMORY mode. 2 Press PROG to display the program screen. 3 Key in
  • Page 7889. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B–63014EN/02 9.4 Sequence number search operation is usually used to search for a sequence number in the middle of a program so that execution can be SEQUENCE NUMBER started or restarted at the block of the sequence number. SEARCH Example) Sequence number 02346 in a pro
  • Page 789B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS Explanations D Operation during Search Those blocks that are skipped do not affect the CNC. This means that the data in the skipped blocks such as coordinates and M, S, and T codes does not alter the CNC coordinates and modal values. So, in the first block
  • Page 7909. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B–63014EN/02 9.5 Programs registered in memory can be deleted,either one program by one program or all at once. Also, More than one program can be deleted by DELETING specifying a range. PROGRAMS 9.5.1 A program registered in memory can be deleted. Deleting One Program
  • Page 791B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS 9.5.3 Programs within a specified range in memory are deleted. Deleting More than One Program by Specifying a Range Procedure for deleting more than one program by specifying a range 1 Select the EDIT mode. 2 Press PROG to display the program screen. 3 Ente
  • Page 7929. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B–63014EN/02 9.6 With the extended part program editing function, the operations described below can be performed using soft keys for programs that have been EXTENDED PART registered in memory. PROGRAM EDITING Following editing operations are available : FUNCTION ⋅ All
  • Page 793B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS 9.6.1 A new program can be created by copying a program. Copying an Entire Program Before copy After copy Oxxxx Oxxxx Oyyyy A Copy A A Fig. 9.6.1 Copying an Entire Program In Fig. 9.6.1, the program with program number xxxx is copied to a newly created prog
  • Page 7949. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B–63014EN/02 9.6.2 A new program can be created by copying part of a program. Copying Part of a Before copy After copy Program Oxxxx Oxxxx Oyyyy A Copy A B B B C C Fig. 9.6.2 Copying Part of a Program In Fig. 9.6.2, part B of the program with program number xxxx is copi
  • Page 795B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS 9.6.3 A new program can be created by moving part of a program. Moving Part of a Program Before copy After copy Oxxxx Oxxxx Oyyyy A Copy A B B C C Fig. 9.6.3 Moving Part of a Program In Fig. 9.6.3, part B of the program with program number xxxx is moved to
  • Page 7969. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B–63014EN/02 9.6.4 Another program can be inserted at an arbitrary position in the current Merging a Program program. Before merge After merge Oxxxx Oyyyy Oxxxx Oyyyy A B Merge A B C B Merge location C Fig. 9.6.4 Merging a program at a specified location In Fig. 9.6.4,
  • Page 797B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS 9.6.5 Supplementary Explanation for Copying, Moving and Merging Explanations D Setting an editing range The setting of an editing range start point with [CRSR] can be changed freely until an editing range end point is set with [CRSR] or [BTTM] . If an ed
  • Page 7989. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B–63014EN/02 Alarm Alarm no. Contents Memory became insufficient while copying or inserting 70 a program. Copy or insertion is terminated. The power was interrupted during copying, moving, or inserting a program and memory used for editing must be cleared. When this ala
  • Page 799B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS 9.6.6 Replace one or more specified words. Replacement of Replacement can be applied to all occurrences or just one occurrence of specified words or addresses in the program. Words and Addresses Procedure for hange of words or addresses 1 Perform steps 1 to
  • Page 8009. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B–63014EN/02 Explanation D Replacing custom The following custom macro words are replaceable: macros IF, WHILE, GOTO, END, DO, BPRNT, DPRINT, POPEN, PCLOS The abbreviations of custom macro words can be specified. When abbreviations are used, however, the screen displays
  • Page 801B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS 9.7 Unlike ordinary programs, custom macro programs are modified, inserted, or deleted based on editing units. EDITING OF Custom macro words can be entered in abbreviated form. CUSTOM MACROS Comments can be entered in a program. Refer to the III–10.1 for th
  • Page 8029. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B–63014EN/02 9.8 Editing a program while executing another program is called background editing. The method of editing is the same as for ordinary editing BACKGROUND (foreground editing). EDITING A program edited in the background should be registered in foreground prog
  • Page 803B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS 9.9 The password function (bit 4 (NE9) of parameter No. 3202) can be locked using parameter No. 3210 (PASSWD) and parameter No. 3211 PASSWORD (KEYWD) to protect program Nos. 9000 to 9999. In the locked state, FUNCTION parameter NE9 cannot be set to 0. In th
  • Page 8049. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B–63014EN/02 D Setting 0 in parameter When 0 is set in the parameter PASSWD, the number 0 is displayed, and PASSWD the password function is disabled. In other words, the password function can be disabled by either not setting parameter PASSWD at all, or by setting 0 in
  • Page 805B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS 9.10 For a 2–path control CNC, setting bit 0 (PCP) of parameter No. 3206 to 1 enables the copying of a specified machining program from one path to COPYING A another. Single–program copy and specified–range copy are supported. PROGRAM BETWEEN TWO PATHS Proc
  • Page 8069. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B–63014EN/02 6 Select one or more programs to be copied. ⋅ Single–program copy (1) Enter the number of the program to be copied. → ” ” (2) Press soft key [SOURCE] to set the number. → SOURCE:PATH?=” ” ⋅ Specified–range copy (1) Enter the range of the programs to be copi
  • Page 807B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS Explanations D Operation flow Program screen Edit mode/BG edit mode Set the data protection key to ON (enable editing) Soft key for starting setting for copy between paths [P COPY] Copy source selection soft key [PATH1] or [PATH2] Not set (selected O number
  • Page 8089. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B–63014EN/02 D Major related alarms Major related alarm numbers Alarm number Description Relevant path P/S 70,70 BP/S0 Insufficient free memory Copy destination P/S 71,71 BP/S Specified program not found Copy source P/S 72,72 BP/S Too many programs Copy destination P/S
  • Page 809B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS D Replacement Even if replacement is enabled, the program is not replaced if the part program storage for the copy destination path does not have sufficient free space. During background editing, copying by replacing the currently running program is not all
  • Page 81010. CREATING PROGRAMS OPERATION B–63014EN/02 10 CREATING PROGRAMS Programs can be created using any of the following methods: ⋅ MDI keyboard ⋅ PROGRAMMING IN TEACH IN MODE ⋅ CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING INPUT WITH GRAPHIC FUNCTION ⋅ CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION ⋅ AUTOMATIC PROGRAM PRE
  • Page 811B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 10. CREATING PROGRAMS 10.1 Programs can be created in the EDIT mode using the program editing functions described in III–9. CREATING PROGRAMS USING THE MDI PANEL Procedure for Creating Programs Using the MDI Panel Procedure 1 Enter the EDIT mode. 2 Press the PROG key. 3 Press
  • Page 81210. CREATING PROGRAMS OPERATION B–63014EN/02 10.2 Sequence numbers can be automatically inserted in each block when a program is created using the MDI keys in the EDIT mode. AUTOMATIC Set the increment for sequence numbers in parameter 3216. INSERTION OF SEQUENCE NUMBERS Procedure for automatic inse
  • Page 813B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 10. CREATING PROGRAMS 9 Press INSERT . The EOB is registered in memory and sequence numbers are automatically inserted. For example, if the initial value of N is 10 and the parameter for the increment is set to 2, N12 inserted and displayed below the line where a new block is
  • Page 81410. CREATING PROGRAMS OPERATION B–63014EN/02 10.3 When the playback option is selected, the TEACH IN JOG mode and TEACH IN HANDLE mode are added. In these modes, a machine position CREATING along the X, Y, and Z axes obtained by manual operation is stored in PROGRAMS IN memory as a program position
  • Page 815B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 10. CREATING PROGRAMS 1 Set the setting data SEQUENCE NO. to 1 (on). (The incremental value parameter (No. 3216) is assumed to be “1”.) 2 Select the TEACH IN HANDLE mode. 3 Make positioning at position P0 by the manual pulse generator. 4 Select the program screen. 5 Enter prog
  • Page 81610. CREATING PROGRAMS OPERATION B–63014EN/02 Explanations D Checking contents of the The contents of memory can be checked in the TEACH IN mode by using memory the same procedure as in EDIT mode. PROGRAM O1234 N00004 (RELATIVE) (ABSOLUTE) X –6.975 X 3.025 Y 23.723 Y 23.723 Z –10.325 Z –0.325 O1234 ;
  • Page 817B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 10. CREATING PROGRAMS 10.4 Programs can be created block after block on the conversational screen while displaying the G code menu. CONVERSATIONAL Blocks in a program can be modified, inserted, or deleted using the G code PROGRAMMING menu and conversational screen. WITH GRAPHI
  • Page 81810. CREATING PROGRAMS OPERATION B–63014EN/02 4 Press the [C.A.P] soft key. The following G code menu is displayed on the screen. If soft keys different from those shown in step 2 are displayed, press the menu return key to display the correct soft keys. PROGRAM O1234 N00004 G00 : POSITIONING G01 : L
  • Page 819B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 10. CREATING PROGRAMS PROGRAM O0010 N00000 G G G G X Y Z H F R M S T B I J K P Q L : EDIT * * * * *** *** 14 : 41 : 10 PRGRM G.MENU BLOCK (OPRT) 7 Move the cursor to the block to be modified on the program screen. At this time, a data address with the cursor blinks. 8 Enter nu
  • Page 82010. CREATING PROGRAMS OPERATION B–63014EN/02 4 After data is changed completely, press the ALTER key. This operation replaces an entire block of a program. Procedure 3 1 On the conversational screen, display the block immediately before a Inserting a block new block is to be inserted, by using the p
  • Page 821B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 11 SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA General To operate a CNC machine tool, various data must be set on the MDI panel for the CNC. The operator can monitor the state of operation with data displayed during operation. This chapter describes how to disp
  • Page 82211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 POSITION DISPLAY SCREEN Screen transition triggered by the function key POS POS Current position screen ABS REL ALL HNDL (OPRT) Position display of Position displays Total position display Manual handle work coordinate relative coordinate of eac
  • Page 823B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA Screen transition triggered by the function key PROG PROGRAM SCREEN in the MEMORY or MDI mode PROG *: Displayed in MDI mode Program screen * MEM MDI PRGRM CHECK CURRNT NEXT (OPRT) Display of proĆ Display of current Display of current gram conten
  • Page 82411. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 Screen transition triggered by the function key PROG PROGRAM SCREEN in the EDIT mode PROG Program screen EDIT PRGRM LIB C.A.P. (OPRT) Program editing Program memory Conversational screen and program diĆ programming ⇒ See III-9 rectory screen ⇒ S
  • Page 825B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OFFSET/SETTING SCREEN Screen transition triggered by the function key OFFSET SETTING OFFSET SETTING Tool offset value OFFSET SETTING WORK (OPRT) Display of tool Display of setĆ Display of workĆ offset value ting data piece coordinate ⇒ See III-1
  • Page 82611. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 SYSTEM SCREEN Screen transition triggered by the function key SYSTEM SYSTEM Parameter screen PARAM DGNOS PMC SYSTEM (OPRT) Display of Display of parameter screen diagnosis ⇒ See III-11.5.1 screen ⇒ See III-7.3 Setting of parameter ⇒ See III-11.5
  • Page 827B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA D Setting screens The table below lists the data set on each screen. Table. 11 Setting screens and data on them Reference No. Setting screen Contents of setting item 1 Tool offset value Tool offset value III–11.4.1 Tool length offset value Cutte
  • Page 82811. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 11.1 Press function key POS to display the current position of the tool. SCREENS The following three screens are used to display the current position of the DISPLAYED BY tool: FUNCTION KEY POS ⋅Position display screen for the work coordinate sys
  • Page 829B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 11.1.1 Displays the current position of the tool in the workpiece coordinate Position Display in the system. The current position changes as the tool moves. The least input increment is used as the unit for numeric values. The title at the top o
  • Page 83011. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 D Display with two–path control (9.5″/10.4″LCD) ACTUAL POSITION O1000 N10010 O2000 N20010 (ACTUAL) (ACTUAL) X1 100.000 X2 400.000 Y1 200.000 Y2 500.000 Z1 300.000 Z2 600.000 (ACTUAL SPEED) F : 0MM/MIN (ACTUAL SPEED) F : 0MM/MIN S: 0RPM S: 0RPM (
  • Page 831B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 11.1.2 Displays the current position of the tool in a relative coordinate system Position Display in the based on the coordinates set by the operator. The current position changes as the tool moves. The increment system is used as the unit for n
  • Page 83211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 D Display with two–path control) (9.5″/10.4″LCD) ACTUAL POSITION O1000 N10010 O2000 N20010 (RELATIVE) (RELATIVE) X1 100.000 X2 400.000 Y1 200.000 Y2 500.000 Z1 300.000 Z2 600.000 (ACTUAL SPEED) F : 0MM/MIN (ACTUAL SPEED) F : 0MM/MIN S: 0RPM S: 0
  • Page 833B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA D Display including Bits 6 and 7 of parameter 3104 (DRL, DRC) can be used to select whether compensation values the displayed values include tool length offset and cutter compensation. D Presetting by setting a Bit 3 of parameter 3104 (PPD) is u
  • Page 83411. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 11.1.3 Displays the following positions on a screen : Current positions of the tool in the workpiece coordinate system, relative coordinate system, and Overall Position machine coordinate system, and the remaining distance. The relative Display
  • Page 835B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA D Display with two–path control (9.5″/10.4″LCD) ACTUAL POSITION O1000 N10010 O2000 N20010 (RELATIVE) (ABSOLUTE) (RELATIVE) (ABSOLUTE) X1 100.000 X1 100.000 X1 100.000 X1 100.000 Y1 100.000 Y1 100.000 Y1 200.000 Y1 200.000 Z1 300.000 Z1 300.000 Z
  • Page 83611. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 11.1.4 A workpiece coordinate system shifted by an operation such as manual Presetting the intervention can be preset using MDI operations to a pre–shift workpiece coordinate system. The latter coordinate system is displaced from the Workpiece C
  • Page 837B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 11.1.5 The actual feedrate on the machine (per minute) can be displayed on a Actual Feedrate current position display screen or program check screen by setting bit 0 (DPF) of parameter 3105. On the 9.5″/10.4″ LCD, the actual feedrate is Display
  • Page 83811. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 D Actual feedrate display In the case of movement of rotary axis, the speed is displayed in units of of rotary axis deg/min but is displayed on the screen in units of input system at that time. For example, when the rotary axis moves at 50 deg/m
  • Page 839B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 11.1.6 The run time, cycle time, and the number of machined parts are displayed Display of Run Time on the current position display screens. and Parts Count Procedure for displaying run time and parts count on the current position display screen
  • Page 84011. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 11.1.7 To perform floating reference position return with a G30.1 command, the Setting the Floating floating reference position must be set beforehand. Reference Position Procedure for setting the floating reference position Procedure 1 Press fu
  • Page 841B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 11.1.8 The reading on the load meter can be displayed for each servo axis and Operating Monitor the serial spindle by setting bit 5 (OPM) of parameter 3111 to 1. The reading on the speedometer can also be displayed for the serial spindle. Displa
  • Page 84211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 D Speedometer Although the speedometer normally indicates the speed of the spindle motor, it can also be used to indicate the speed of the spindle by setting bit 6 (OPS) of parameter 3111 to 1. The spindle speed to be displayed during operation
  • Page 843B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 11.2 This section describes the screens displayed by pressing function key SCREENS PROG in MEMORY or MDI mode.The first four of the following screens DISPLAYED BY display the execution state for the program currently being executed in MEMORY or
  • Page 84411. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 11.2.1 Displays the program currently being executed in MEMORY or MDI Program Contents mode. Display Procedure for displaying the program contents 1 Press function key PROG to display the program screen. 2 Press chapter selection soft key [PRGRM
  • Page 845B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 11.2.2 Displays the block currently being executed and modal data in the Current Block Display MEMORY or MDI mode. Screen Procedure for displaying the current block display screen Procedure 1 Press function key PROG . 2 Press chapter selection s
  • Page 84611. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 11.2.3 Displays the block currently being executed and the block to be executed Next Block Display next in the MEMORY or MDI mode. Screen Procedure for displaying the next block display screen Procedure 1 Press function key PROG . 2 Press chapte
  • Page 847B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 11.2.4 Displays the program currently being executed, current position of the Program Check Screen tool, and modal data in the MEMORY mode. Procedure for displaying the program check screen Procedure 1 Press function key PROG . 2 Press chapter s
  • Page 84811. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 D Display with two–path control (9.5″/10.4″LCD) PROGRAM CHECK O1000 N01010 PROGRAM CHECK O2000 N02010 O0010 ; O0020 ; G92 G90 X100.0 Y200. Z50. ; G28 X10. Y10. Z10. ; G00 X0 Y0 Z0 ; G00 X50. Y20. Z–50. ; G01 Z250. F1000 ; X100. ; X50. Y20. ; G01
  • Page 849B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA D 9.5″/10.4″LCD The program check screen is not provided for 9.5″/10.4″ LCD. Press soft key [PRGRM] to display the contents of the program on the right half of the screen. The block currently being executed is indicated by the cursor. The curren
  • Page 85011. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 11.2.5 Displays the program input from the MDI and modal data in the MDI Program Screen for mode. MDI Operation Procedure for displaying the program screen for MDI operation Procedure 1 Press function key PROG . 2 Press chapter selection soft ke
  • Page 851B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 11.2.6 When a machining program is executed, the machining time of the main Stamping the program is displayed on the program machining time display screen. The machining times of up to ten main programs are displayed in Machining Time hours/minu
  • Page 85211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 5 To calculate the machining times of additional programs, repeat the above procedure. The machining time display screen displays the executed main program numbers and their machining times sequentially. Note, that machining time data cannot be
  • Page 853B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA Procedure 2 1 To insert the calculated machining time of a program in a program as a Stamping machining comment, the machining time of the program must be displayed on time the machining time display screen. Before stamping the machining time of
  • Page 85411. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 4 If a comment already exists in the block containing the program number of a program whose machining time is to be inserted, the machining time is inserted after the existing comment. PROGRAM O0100 0N0000 O0100 (SHAFT XSF001) ; N10 G92 X100. Z1
  • Page 855B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA Explanations D Machining time Machining time is counted from the initial start after a reset in memory operation mode to the next reset. If a reset does not occur during operation, machining time is counted from the start to M03 (or M30). Howeve
  • Page 85611. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 D Program directory When the machining time inserted into a program is displayed on the program directory screen and the comment after the program number consists of only machining time data, the machining time is displayed in both the program n
  • Page 857B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA Example 2: Program directory screen when two or more machining times are stamped. PROGRAM O0260 N00000 O0260 (SHAFT XSF302) (001H15M59S) (001H20M01S) ; N10 G92 X100. Z10. ; N20 S1500 M03 ; N30 G00 X20.5 Z5. T0101 ; N40 G01 Z–10. F25. ; N50 G02 X
  • Page 85811. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 Example 3: Program directory screen when inserted machining time data does not conform to the format hhhHmmMssS (3–digit number followed by H, 2–digit number followed by M, and 2–digit number followed by S, in this order) PROGRAM O0280 N00000 O0
  • Page 859B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 11.3 This section describes the screens displayed by pressing function key SCREENS PROG in the EDIT mode. Function key PROG in the EDIT mode can DISPLAYED BY display the program editing screen and the program list screen (displays FUNCTION KEY #
  • Page 86011. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 Explanations D Details of memory used PROGRAM NO. USED PROGRAM NO. USED : The number of the programs registered (including the subprograms) FREE : The number of programs which can be registered additionally. MEMORY AREA USED MEMORY AREA USED : T
  • Page 861B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA D Order in which programs When no program has been deleted from the list, each program is are registered registered at the end of the list. If some programs in the list were deleted, then a new program is registered, the new program is inserted
  • Page 86211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 11.3.2 In addition to the normal listing of the numbers and names of CNC Displaying a Program programs stored in memory, programs can be listed in units of groups, according to the product to be machined, for example. List for a Specified Group
  • Page 863B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 8 Pressing the [EXEC] operation soft key displays the group–unit EXEC program list screen, listing all those programs whose name includes the specified character string. PROGRAM DIRECTORY (GROUP) O0001 N00010 PROGRAM (NUM.) MEMORY (CHAR.) USED:
  • Page 86411. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 [Example of using wild cards] (Entered character string) (Group for which the search will be made) (a) “*” CNC programs having any name (b) “*ABC” CNC programs having names which end with “ABC” (c) “ABC*” CNC programs having names which start wi
  • Page 865B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 11.4 Press function key OFFSET SETTING to display or set tool compensation values and SCREENS other data. DISPLAYED BY This section describes how to display or set the following data: FUNCTION KEY OFFSET SETTING 1. Tool offset value #OFFSETSETTI
  • Page 86611. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 11.4.1 Tool offset values, tool length offset values, and cutter compensation Setting and Displaying values are specified by D codes or H codes in a program. Compensation values corresponding to D codes or H codes are displayed or set on the the
  • Page 867B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 3 Move the cursor to the compensation value to be set or changed using page keys and cursor keys, or enter the compensation number for the compensation value to be set or changed and press soft key [NO.SRH]. 4 To set a compensation value, enter
  • Page 86811. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 D 9.5″/10.4″ LCD OFFSET O0000 N00000 NO. DATA NO. DATA ACTUAL POSITION (RELATIVE) 001 0.000 017 0.000 002 003 0.000 0.000 018 019 0.000 0.000 X–12345.678 004 005 0.000 0.000 020 021 0.000 0.000 Y–12345.678 006 007 0.000 0.000 022 023 0.000 0.000
  • Page 869B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 11.4.2 The length of the tool can be measured and registered as the tool length Tool Length offset value by moving the reference tool and the tool to be measured until they touch the specified position on the machine. Measurement The tool length
  • Page 87011. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 8 Press the soft key [INP.C.]. The Z axis relative coordinate value is input and displayed as an tool length offset value. INP.C. ÇÇ ÇÇÇ ÇÇ ÇÇÇ Reference ÇÇ ÇÇÇ tool ÇÇ The difference is set as a tool length offset value A prefixed position 850
  • Page 871B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 11.4.3 Data such as the TV check flag and punch code is set on the setting data Displaying and screen. On this screen, the operator can also enable/disable parameter writing, enable/disable the automatic insertion of sequence numbers in Entering
  • Page 87211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 4 Move the cursor to the item to be changed by pressing cursor keys , , , or . 5 Enter a new value and press soft key [INPUT]. Contents of settings D PARAMETER WRITE Setting whether parameter writing is enabled or disabled. 0 : Disabled 1 : Enab
  • Page 873B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 11.4.4 If a block containing a specified sequence number appears in the program Sequence Number being executed, operation enters single block mode after the block is executed. Comparison and Stop Procedure for sequence number comparison and stop
  • Page 87411. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 Explanations D Sequence number after After the specified sequence number is found during the execution of the the program is executed program, the sequence number set for sequence number compensation and stop is decremented by one. When the powe
  • Page 875B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 11.4.5 Various run times, the total number of machined parts, number of parts Displaying and Setting required, and number of machined parts can be displayed. This data can be set by parameters or on this screen (except for the total number of Ru
  • Page 87611. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 D PARTS COUNT This value is incremented by one when M02, M30, or an M code specified by parameter 6710 is executed. The value can also be set by parameter 6711. In general, this value is reset when it reaches the number of parts required. Refer
  • Page 877B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 11.4.6 Displays the workpiece origin offset for each workpiece coordinate Displaying and Setting system (G54 to G59, G54.1 P1 to G54.1 P48 and G54.1 P1 to G54.1 P300) and external workpiece origin offset. The workpiece origin offset the Workpiec
  • Page 87811. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 11.4.7 This function is used to compensate for the difference between the Direct Input of programmed workpiece coordinate system and the actual workpiece coordinate system. The measured offset for the origin of the workpiece Measured Workpiece c
  • Page 879B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 5 To display the workpiece origin offset setting screen, press the chapter selection soft key [WORK]. WORK COORDINATES O1234 N56789 (G54) NO. DATA NO. DATA 00 X 0.000 02 X 0.000 (EXT) Y 0.000 (G55) Y 0.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000 01 X 0.000 03 X 0.000 (
  • Page 88011. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 11.4.8 Displays common variables (#100 to #149 or #100 to #199, and #500 to Displaying and Setting #531 or #500 to #999) on the CRT. When the absolute value for a common variable exceeds 99999999, ******** is displayed. The values for Custom Mac
  • Page 881B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 11.4.9 This subsection uses an example to describe how to display or set Displaying Pattern machining menus (pattern menus) created by the machine tool builder. Refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder for the actual Data and Patte
  • Page 88211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 4 Enter necessary pattern data and press INPUT . 5 After entering all necessary data, enter the MEMORY mode and press the cycle start button to start machining. Explanations D Explanation of the HOLE PATTERN : Menu title pattern menu screen An o
  • Page 883B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 11.4.10 With this function, functions of the switches on the machine operator’s Displaying and Setting panel can be controlled from the CRT/MDI panel. Jog feed can be performed using numeric keys. the Software Operator’s Panel Procedure for disp
  • Page 88411. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 4 Move the cursor to the desired switch by pressing cursor key or . 5 Push the cursor move key or to match the mark J to an arbitrary position and set the desired condition. 6 Press one of the following arrow keys to perform jog feed. Press the
  • Page 885B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 11.4.11 Tool life data can be displayed to inform the operator of the current state Displaying and Setting of tool life management. Groups which require tool changes are also displayed.The tool life counter for each group can be preset to an arb
  • Page 88611. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 5 To display the page containing the data for a group, enter the group number and press soft key [NO.SRH]. The cursor can be moved to an arbitrary group by pressing cursor key or . 6 To change the value in the life counter for a group, move the
  • Page 887B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA Explanations D Display contents TOOL LIFE DATA : O3000 N00060 SELECTED GROUP 000 GROUP 001 : LIFE 0150 COUNT 0007 * 0034 # 0078 @ 0012 0056 0090 0035 0026 0061 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 GROUP 002 : LIFE 1400 COUNT 0000 0062 0024 00
  • Page 88811. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 11.4.12 The extended tool life management function provides more detailed data Displaying and Setting display and more data editing functions than the ordinary tool life management function. Extended Tool Life Moreover, if the tool life is speci
  • Page 889B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA ⋅ Deleting a tool group : 7–4 ⋅ Deleting tool data (T, H, or D code) : 7–5 ⋅ Skipping a tool : 7–6 ⋅ Clearing the life count (resetting the life) : 7–7 7–1 Setting the life count type, life value, current life count, and tool data (T, H, or D co
  • Page 89011. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 7–4 Deleting a tool group (1) In step 3, position the cusor on a group to be deleted and display the editing screen. (2) Press soft key [DELETE]. (3) Press soft key [GROUP]. (4) Press soft key [EXEC]. 7–5 Deleting tool data (T, H, or D code) (1)
  • Page 891B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA Explanations D Displays LIFE DATA EDIT GROUP : 001 O0010 N00001 TYPE : 1 (1:C 2:M) NEXT GROUP: *** LIFE : 9800 USE GROUP : *** COUNT : 6501 SELECTED GROUP : 001 NO. STATE T–CODE H–CODE D–CODE 01 * 0034 011 005 02 # 0078 000 033 03 @ 0012 004 018
  • Page 89211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 D Tool life management When the extended tool life management function is provided, the screen following items are added to the tool life management screen: S NEXT: Tool group to be used next S USE: Tool group in use S Life counter type for each
  • Page 893B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 11.4.13 Chopping data, including the reference point (R point), upper dead point, Displaying and Setting lower dead point, and chopping feedrate, can be displayed and set by using the chopping screen. Chopping Data Procedure for displaying and s
  • Page 89411. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 Limitations D Chopping feedrate If bit 7 (CHPX) of parameter No. 8360 is set to 1, the chopping feedrate cannot be set by using the chopping screen. D Data setting conditions The chopping screen can be used to set chopping data regardless of the
  • Page 895B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OFFSET 01234 N12345 No. GEOMETRY (MACHINE) 001 100.000 X–12345.678 002 200.000 Y–12345.678 003 300.000 Z–12345.678 004 400.000 A–12345.678 005 500.000 B–12345.678 006 600.000 C–12345.678 007 700.000 U–12345.678 008 800.000 V–12345.678 009 900.00
  • Page 89611. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 NOTE Pressing the RESET key resets the displayed T and M addresses to 0. Once MEM or MDI mode has been selected, however, the modal T and M codes are displayed. 4 Use the numeric keys to enter the distance from the base measurement surface to th
  • Page 897B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA Explanations D Definition of tool length In general, the tool length offset value can be defined in either of the offset value following two ways. Both methods are based on the same concept: The difference between the tip position of the tool an
  • Page 89811. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 Machine zero point (Reference tool OFSL Tool OFSL Tool tip position) 01 T01 Zm Zt Zm L Measurement surface Measurement Workpiece !Hm surface Reference block Hm Base measure- ment surface Machine table Machine table L : Distance from the referenc
  • Page 899B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA (2) Definition 2 In the second definition method, the tool length offset is the distance from the tool tip position to the workpiece coordinate system origin when the machine is positioned to the Z–axis zero point. A tool length offset defined i
  • Page 90011. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 The base measurement surface for this definition is located at the workpiece coordinate system origin. Because the tip of the reference tool is also located at the workpiece coordinate system origin, distance L from the reference tool tip positi
  • Page 901B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA The reference tool for definition 2 has a tip at the workpiece coordinate system origin when the machine is positioned to the Z–axis zero point. Whenever the workpiece is changed, therefore, the tool length offset must be remeasured. Remeasuring
  • Page 90211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 Procedure for measuring the workpiece origin offset In addition to the workpiece origin offset along the tool lengthwise axis, that is, the Z–axis, the workpiece origin offsets along the X– and Y–axes, on a plane perpendicular to the Z–axis, can
  • Page 903B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA To set the workpiece origin on other than the workpiece top surface (for example, when the origin is shifted from the workpiece top surface by an amount equal to the cutting allowance), enter the amount of shift (S in the following figure) using
  • Page 90411. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 6 As soon as the sensor detects contact with the circumference, input a skip signal to the machine, thus stopping the axial movement of manual handle feed or jog feed. Simultaneously, the position at which feed stopped is stored as the first mea
  • Page 905B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA Machine zero point Tool OFSL OFSWG54 ZmG54 OFSWG55! ZmG55 Workpiece origin (G55) Workpiece origin Workpiece (G55) (G54) Workpiece (G54) OFSL : Tool length offset for the tool used to measure the workpiece origin offset ZmG54 : Amount of movement
  • Page 90611. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 (2) Definition 2 The tool length offset in definition 2 equals the Z–axis workpiece origin offset, as described above. Usually in this case, therefore, the workpiece origin offset need not be set. If, however, the workpiece is changed after its
  • Page 907B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA D X–/Y–axis workpiece The X– and Y–axis workpiece origin offsets can be measured regardless origin offset of whether the workpiece origin is located on a surface of the workpiece or at the center of a hole to be machined. (1) When the workpiece
  • Page 90811. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 +Z +X Tool Workpiece OFSR Xm OFSW Machine Workpiece zero point origin OFSR : Cutter compensation value for the tool used to measure the workpiece origin offset Xm : Amount of movement from the machine zero point to the workpiece origin when meas
  • Page 909B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA (2) When the workpiece origin is located at the center of a hole. +Y +X Workpiece origin Y–axis workpiece origin offset Machine zero point X–axis workpiece origin offset In the above case, the workpiece origin is located at the center of a hole
  • Page 91011. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 D Using a skip signal A measurement probe, fitted with a sensor, can also be used to measure the Z–axis workpiece origin offset or measure the X–/Y–axis workpiece origin offset based on a surface, in the same way as when measuring the X–/Y–axis
  • Page 911B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 11.5 When the CNC and machine are connected, parameters must be set to determine the specifications and functions of the machine in order to fully SCREENS utilize the characteristics of the servo motor or other parts. DISPLAYED BY This chapter d
  • Page 91211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 11.5.1 When the CNC and machine are connected, parameters are set to Displaying and Setting determine the specifications and functions of the machine in order to fully utilize the characteristics of the servo motor. The setting of parameters Par
  • Page 913B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA Procedure for enabling/displaying parameter writing 1 Select the MDI mode or enter state emergency stop. 2 Press function key OFFSET SETTING . 3 Press soft key [SETING] to display the setting screen. SETTING (HANDY) O0001 N00000 PARAMETER WRITE
  • Page 91411. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 11.5.2 If pitch error compensation data is specified, pitch errors of each axis can Displaying and Setting be compensated in detection unit per axis. Pitch error compensation data is set for each compensation point at the Pitch Error intervals s
  • Page 915B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA Procedure for displaying and setting the pitch error compensation data Procedure 1 Set the following parameters: S Number of the pitch error compensation point at the reference position (for each axis): Parameter 3620 S Number of the pitch error
  • Page 91611. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 11.6 The program number, sequence number, and current CNC status are always displayed on the screen except when the power is turned on, a DISPLAYING THE system alarm occurs, or the PMC screen is displayed. PROGRAM NUMBER, If data setting or the
  • Page 917B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 11.6.2 The current mode, automatic operation state, alarm state, and program Displaying the Status editing state are displayed on the next to last line on the screen allowing the operator to readily understand the operation condition of the syst
  • Page 91811. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 (5) Emergency stop or ––EMG–– : : Indicates emergency stop.(Blinks in reversed display.) reset status ––RESET–– : Indicates that the reset signal is being received. (6) Alarm status ALM : Indicates that an alarm is issued. (Blinks in reversed di
  • Page 919B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 11.7 By pressing the function key MESSAGE , data such as alarms, alarm history SCREENS data, and external messages can be displayed. DISPLAYED BY For information relating to alarm display, see Section III.7.1. For FUNCTION KEY MESSAGE informatio
  • Page 92011. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 Explanations D Updating external When an external operator message number is specified, updating of the operator message external operator message history data is started; this updating is history data continued until a new external operator mes
  • Page 921B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 11.8 When screen indication isn’t necessary, the life of the back light for LCD can be put off by turning off the back light. CLEARING THE The screen can be cleared by pressing specific keys. It is also possible to SCREEN specify the automatic c
  • Page 92211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63014EN/02 11.8.2 The CNC screen is automatically cleared if no keys are pressed during the Automatic Erase period (in minutes) specified with a parameter. The screen is restored by pressing any key. Screen Display Procedure for automatic erase screen disp
  • Page 923B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION 12 GRAPHICS FUNCTION Two graphic functions are available. One is a graphic display function, and the other is a dynamic graphic display function. The graphic display function can draw the tool path specified by a program being executed on a screen. The gr
  • Page 92412. GRAPHICS FUNCTION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 12.1 It is possible to draw the programmed tool path on the screen, which makes it possible to check the progress of machining, while observing the GRAPHICS DISPLAY path on the screen. In addition, it is also possible to enlarge/reduce the screen. Before
  • Page 925B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION 6 Automatic operation is started and machine movement is drawn on the screen. 0001 00012 X 0.000 Y 0.000 Z 0.000 Z X Y S 0T MEM * * * * *** *** 14 : 23 : 03 PARAM GRAPH Explanation D RANGE The size of the graphic screen will be as follows: (Actual graphic
  • Page 92612. GRAPHICS FUNCTION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 1. Setting the center Set the center of the graphic range to the center of the screen. If the coordinate of the drawing range in the program can be contained in the above actual graphics range and graphics range, set the magnification to 1 (actual value s
  • Page 927B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION 2. Setting the maximum When the actual tool path is not near the center of the screen, method 1 and minimum will cause the tool path to be drawn out of the geaphics range if graphics coordinates for the magnification is not set properly. drawing range in
  • Page 92812. GRAPHICS FUNCTION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 D Graphics parameter ⋅ AXES Specify the plane to use for drawing. The user can choose from the following six coordinate systems. With two–path control, a different drawing coordinate system can be selected for each tool post. Y Z Y =0 : Select (1) =1 : Se
  • Page 929B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION ⋅ GRAPHIC CENTER X= Y= Z= Set the coordinate value on the workpiece coordinate system at graphic center. NOTE 1 When MAX. and MIN. of RANGE are set, the values will be set automatically once drawing is executed 2 When setting the graphics range with the g
  • Page 93012. GRAPHICS FUNCTION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 12.2 There are the following two functions in Dynamic Graphics. DYNAMIC GRAPHIC Path graphic This is used to draw the path of tool center com- manded by the part program. DISPLAY Solid graphic This is used to draw the workpiece figure machined by tool mov
  • Page 931B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION 11. Displaying Coordinate axes and actual size dimension lines are displayed together coordinate axes and with the drawing so that actual size can be referenced. actual size dimensions lines The first six functions above (1. to 6.) are available by settin
  • Page 93212. GRAPHICS FUNCTION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 2 There are two screens for setting drawing parameters. Press the page key according to the setting items for selecting screens. 3 Set the cursor to an item to be set by cursor keys. 4 Input numerics by numeric keys. 5 Press the INPUT key. The input numer
  • Page 933B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION Partial enlargement 11 For partial drawing enlargement, display the PATH GRAPHIC (SCALE) screen by pressing the soft key [ZOOM] on the PATH GRAPHIC (PARAMETER) screen of step 1 above. The tool path is displayed. Next, press soft key [(OPRT)]. PATH GRAPHIC
  • Page 93412. GRAPHICS FUNCTION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 Mark display 15 To display a mark at the current tool position, display the PATH GRAPHIC (POSITION) screen by pressing soft key [POS] on the PATH GRAPHIC (PARAMETER) screen of step 1 above. This mark blinks at the current tool center position on the tool
  • Page 935B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION D Isometric projection Projector view by isometric can be drawn. (XYZ,ZXY) Z Y P=4 P=5 X Y Z X XYZ ZXY Fig. 12.2.1 (a) Coordinate systems for the isometric projection D Biplane view Y Z P=6 X X Fig. 12.2.1 (b) Coordinate systems for the biplane view Bipla
  • Page 93612. GRAPHICS FUNCTION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 D TILTING The tilting angle of the vertical axis is set in the range of –90°to +90°in reference to the horizontal axis crossing the vertical axis at a right angle. When a positive value is set, the vertical axis slants to the other side of the graphic scr
  • Page 937B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION D TOOL COMP. It is possible to set whether the tool path is drawn by making the tool length offset or cutter compensation valid or invalid. Setting value Tool length offset or cutter compensation 0 Perform drawing by making tool compensation valid (An act
  • Page 93812. GRAPHICS FUNCTION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 D Graphic program No part program which has not been registered in memory can be drawn. Also, it is necessary that the M02 or M30 should be commanded at the end of the part program. D Mark for the tool current The period of mark blinking is short when the
  • Page 939B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION 12.2.2 The solid graphics draws the figure of a workpieces machined by the movement of a tool. Solid Graphics The following graphic functions are provided : 1. Solid model graphic Solid model graphic is drawn by surfaces so that the machined figure can be
  • Page 94012. GRAPHICS FUNCTION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 Solid graphics drawing procedure Procedure 1 To draw a machining profile, necessary data must be set beforehand. So press the function key GRAPH ( CUSTOM GRAPH for the small MDI). The screen of ”SOLID GRAPHIC (PARAMETER) ” is displayed. SOLID GRAPHIC (PAR
  • Page 941B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION 6 Press soft key [ANEW]. This allows the blank figure drawing to be performed based on the blank figure data set. 7 Press soft keys [+ROT] [–ROT] [+TILT], and [–TILT], when performing drawing by changing the drawing directions. Parameters P and Q for the
  • Page 94212. GRAPHICS FUNCTION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 10 Press soft key [(OPRT)] and press either soft key [A.ST] or [F.ST]. When [A.ST] is pressed, the status of machining in progress is drawn by simulation. When [F.ST] is pressed, the profile during machining is not drawn. Only the finished profile produce
  • Page 943B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION 15 To redraw the figure in a different mode, press soft key [+ROT], [–ROT], [+TILT], or [–TILT]. Parameters P and Q for the drawing direction are changed and the figure is redrawn with the new paramaters. D Triplane view drawing 16 The machined figure can
  • Page 94412. GRAPHICS FUNCTION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 Explanations GRAPHICS PARAMETER D BLANK FORM ♦ BLANK FORM (P) Set the type of blank figure under P. The relationship between the setting value and figure is as follows: P Blank figure 0 Rectangular parallelepiped (Cubed) 1 Column or cylinder (parallel to
  • Page 945B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION D TOOL FORM ♦ Machining tool Set the machining direction of tools. The relationship between the setting orientation (P) value and machining direction is as shown below. P Machining direction of tools 0,1 Parallel to the Z–axis (perform machining from the
  • Page 94612. GRAPHICS FUNCTION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 D INTENSITY Specify the intensity of the drawing screen when performing drawing on the monochrome, and the color of the drawing screen when performing drawing on the color screen. The relationship between the setting, intensity, and color is as shown belo
  • Page 947B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION D START SEQ. NO. and Specify the start sequence number and end sequence number of each END SEQ. NO. drawing in a five–digit numeric. The subject part program is executed from the head. But only the part enclosed by the start sequence number and end sequen
  • Page 94812. GRAPHICS FUNCTION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 D TOOL COMP. In solid graphics, parameter 6501 (TLC, bit 1) is used to specify whether to apply tool length offset. D Graphic method Parameter 6501 (3PL, bit 2) is used to select whether to draw a triplane view with the third–angle or first–angle projecti
  • Page 949B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION Examples D Side view selection in triplane drawing Example) The side views of the figure below are illustrated. Rear view Top view Left side view Right side view Front view In the above figure, the side views displayed are switched as follows. Right view
  • Page 95012. GRAPHICS FUNCTION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 D Cross section position Some examples of cross–sectional views are given below for the left view selection in triplane and front view shown on the previous page. drawing Sectional view 1 Sectional view 2 Õ ÕÕÕ Õ Õ ÕÕÕ Õ ÕÕ Õ ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕ Õ ÕÕÕÕÕ ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕ ÕÕÕ
  • Page 951B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION 12.3 The background drawing function enables the drawing of a figure for one program while machining a workpiece under the control of another BACKGROUND program. DRAWING Procedure for Background Drawing Procedure 1 Press the GRAPH function key ( CUSTOM fo
  • Page 95212. GRAPHICS FUNCTION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 D Tool offsets Separate tool offsets are internally provided for machining and background drawing. Upon starting drawing or when selecting a program for drawing, the tool offset data for machining is copied to the tool offset data for background drawing.
  • Page 953B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION D Displaying the Bit 5 (DPO) of parameter No. 6500 can be used to specify whether the coordinates coordinates of the current position are to be displayed on the tool path drawing. In background drawing mode, modal information F, S, and T is displayed, tog
  • Page 95413. HELP FUNCTION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 13 HELP FUNCTION The help function displays on the screen detailed information about alarms issued in the CNC and about CNC operations. The following information is displayed. D Detailed information of When the CNC is operated incorrectly or an erroneous mach
  • Page 955B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 13. HELP FUNCTION ALARM DETAIL screen 2 Press soft key [1 ALAM] on the HELP (INITIAL MENU) screen to display detailed information about an alarm currently being raised. HELP (ALARM DETAIL) O0010 N00001 NUMBER : 027 Alarm No. M‘SAGE : NO AXES COMMANDED IN G43/G44 Normal explana
  • Page 95613. HELP FUNCTION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 3 To get details on another alarm number, first enter the alarm number, then press soft key [SELECT]. This operation is useful for investigating alarms not currently being raised. >100 S 0 T0000 MEM **** *** *** 10:12:25 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ SELECT ] Fig. 13 (d)
  • Page 957B–63014EN/02 OPERATION 13. HELP FUNCTION >1 S 0 T0000 MEM **** *** *** 10:12:25 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ SELECT ] Fig. 13 (g) How to select each OPERATION METHOD screen When “1. PROGRAM EDIT” is selected, for example, the screen in Figure 13 (h) is displayed. On each OPERATION METHOD screen, it is possible
  • Page 95813. HELP FUNCTION OPERATION B–63014EN/02 The current page No. is shown at the upper right corner on the screen. HELP (PARAMETER TABLE) 01234 N00001 1/4 * SETTEING (No. 0000∼) * READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE (No. 0100∼) * AXIS CONTROL /SETTING UNIT (No. 1000∼) * COORDINATE SYSTEM (No. 1200∼) * STROKE LIMI
  • Page 959IV. MAINTENANC
  • Page 960B–63014EN/02 MAINTENANCE 1. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY 1 METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY This chapter describes how to replace the CNC backup battery and absolute pulse coder battery. This chapter consists of the following sections: 1.1 REPLACING BATTERY FOR LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES 1.2 REPLACING THE
  • Page 9611. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY MAINTENANCE B–63014EN/02 1.1 REPLACING BATTERY FOR LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES D Replacement procedure When a lithium battery is used Prepare a new lithium battery (ordering code: A02B–0200–K102 (FANUC specification: A98L–0031–0012)). 1) Turn on the power to the CNC. Aft
  • Page 962B–63014EN/02 MAINTENANCE 1. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY CAUTION Steps 1) to 3) should be completed within 30 minutes (or within 5 minutes for the 160i/180i with the PC function). Do not leave the control unit without a battery for any longer than the specified period. Otherwise, the contents of memo
  • Page 9631. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY MAINTENANCE B–63014EN/02 Replacing 1) Prepare two alkaline dry cells (size D) commercially available. commercial alkaline dry 2) Turn on the power to the Series 16i/18i/160i/180i. cells (size D) 3) Remove the battery case cover. 4) Replace the cells, paying careful att
  • Page 964B–63014EN/02 MAINTENANCE 1. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY 1.2 REPLACING THE BATTERY FOR STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES D Replacing the battery If a lithium battery is used, have A02B–0200–K102 (FANUC internal code: A98L–0031–0012) handy. (1) Turn the CNC on. About 30 seconds later, turn the CNC off. (2) Re
  • Page 9651. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY MAINTENANCE B–63014EN/02 NOTE Complete steps (1) to (3) within 30 minutes. If the battery is left removed for a long time, the memory would lose the contents. If there is a danger that the replacement cannot be completed within 30 minutes, save the whole contents of th
  • Page 966B–63014EN/02 MAINTENANCE 1. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY 2 dry cells Lid Connection terminal on the back 4 mounting holes Case 947
  • Page 9671. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY MAINTENANCE B–63014EN/02 1.3 A lithium battery is used to back up BIOS data in the intelligent terminal. This battery is factory–set in the intelligent terminal. This battery has BATTERY IN THE sufficient capacity to retain BIOS data for one year. INTELLIGENT When the
  • Page 968B–63014EN/02 MAINTENANCE 1. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY Lithium battery Front Rear view Side view BAT1 Lithium battery connection 949
  • Page 9691. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY MAINTENANCE B–63014EN/02 1.4 One battery unit can maintain current position data for six absolute pulse coders for a year. BATTERY FOR When the voltage of the battery becomes low, APC alarms 3n6 to 3n8 (n: SEPARATE axis number) are displayed on the CRT display. When AP
  • Page 970B–63014EN/02 MAINTENANCE 1. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY 1.5 The battery for the absolute pulse coder built into the motor is installed in the servo amplifier. For how to connect and replace the battery, refer BATTERY FOR to the following manuals: ABSOLUTE PULSE D FANUC SERVO MOTOR α Series Maintenan
  • Page 971APPENDI
  • Page 972B–63014EN/02 APPENDIX A. TAPE CODE LIST A TAPE CODE LIST ISO code EIA code Meaning Without With Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CUSTOM CUSTOM MACURO B MACRO B 0 ff f 0 f f Number 0 1 f ff f f 1 f f Number 1 2 f ff f f 2 f f Number 2 3 ff f ff 3 f f f f Number 3 4 f ff f f 4 f f N
  • Page 973A. TAPE CODE LIST APPENDIX B–63014EN/02 ISO code EIA code Meaning Without With CUSTOM CUSTOM Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 MACRO MACRO B B DEL fffff f fff Del ffff f f f f Delete × × (deleting a mispunch) NUL f Blank f No punch. With EIA × × code, this code cannot be used in a
  • Page 974B–63014EN/02 APPENDIX A. TAPE CODE LIST NOTE 1 The symbols used in the remark column have the following meanings. (Space) : The character will be registered in memory and has a specific meaning. It it is used incorrectly in a statement other than a comment, an alarm occurs. × : The character will no
  • Page 975B. LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND TAPE FORMAT APPENDIX B–63014EN/02 B LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND TAPE FORMAT Some functions cannot be added as options depending on the model. In the tables below, IP :presents a combination of arbitrary axis addresses using X,Y,Z,A,B and C (such as X_Y_Z_A_). x = 1st basic axis (X
  • Page 976B. LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND B–63014EN/02 APPENDIX TAPE FORMAT Functions Illustration Tape format Dwell (G04) X_ ; G04 P_ Look–ahead control (G08) G08 P1: Look–ahead control mode on G08 P0: Look–ahead control mode off Exact stop (G09) Velocity G01 G02 IP _; G09 G03 Time Change of offset G10 L11 P_R_; va
  • Page 977B. LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND TAPE FORMAT APPENDIX B–63014EN/02 Functions Illustration Tape format Skip function (G31) IP G31 IP_ F_; Skip signal Start point F Thread cutting (G33) G33 IP_ F_; !F : Lead ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ G41 G17 Cutter compensation C G41 (G40 – G42) G18 D_ ; ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ G40 G42 G19 ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ D : Too
  • Page 978B. LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND B–63014EN/02 APPENDIX TAPE FORMAT Functions Illustration Tape format P4 P3 Scaling (G50, G51) G51 IP_ P_; P4’ P3’ IP P : Scaling magnification P1’ P2’ G50 ; Cancel P1 P2 Mirror Programmable mirror G51.1 IP _ ; image (G50.1, G51.1) G50.1 ; ……Cancel Setting of local G52 IP _ ;
  • Page 979B. LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND TAPE FORMAT APPENDIX B–63014EN/02 Functions Illustration Tape format Coordinate system Y G17 X_ Y_ rotation (G68, G69) G68 G18 Z_ X_ Rα; a G19 Y_ Z_ (x y) G69 ; Cancel X (In case of X–Y plane) Refer to II.14. FUNCTIONS TO G80 ; Cancel Canned cycles (G73, G74, G80 – G89) SIMP
  • Page 980B–63014EN/02 APPENDIX C. RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE C RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE Linear axis D In case of millimeter Increment system input, feed screw is IS–B IS–C millimeter Least input increment 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm Least command increment 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm Max. programmable dimension ±99999.999 mm ±9999.
  • Page 981C. RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE APPENDIX B–63014EN/02 D In case of inch input, Increment system feed screw is inch IS–B IS–C Least input increment 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch Least command increment 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch Max. programmable dimension ±9999.9999 inch ±9999.9999 inch Max. rapid traverse Note
  • Page 982B–63014EN/02 APPENDIX C. RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE Rotation axis Increment system IS–B IS–C Least input increment 0.001 deg 0.0001 deg Least command increment 0.001 deg 0.0001 deg Max. programmable dimension ±99999.999 deg ±9999.9999 deg Max. rapid traverse Note 240000 deg/min 100000 deg/min Feedrate r
  • Page 983D. NOMOGRAPHS APPENDIX B–63014EN/02 D NOMOGRAPHS 966
  • Page 984B–63014EN/02 APPENDIX D. NOMOGRAPHS D.1 The leads of a thread are generally incorrect in δ1 and δ2, as shown in Fig. D.1 (a), due to automatic acceleration and deceleration. INCORRECT Thus distance allowances must be made to the extent of δ1 and δ2 in the THREADED LENGTH program. δ2 δ1 Fig. D.1 (a)
  • Page 985D. NOMOGRAPHS APPENDIX B–63014EN/02 D How to use nomograph First specify the class and the lead of a thread. The thread accuracy, α, will be obtained at (1), and depending on the time constant of cutting feed acceleration/ deceleration, the δ1 value when V = 10mm / s will be obtained at (2). Then, d
  • Page 986B–63014EN/02 APPENDIX D. NOMOGRAPHS D.2 SIMPLE CALCULATION OF INCORRECT THREAD LENGTH δ2 δ1 Fig. D.2 (a) Incorrect threaded portion Explanations D How to determine δ2 d 2 + LR 1800 * (mm) R : Spindle speed (rpm) * When time constant T of the L : Thread lead (mm) servo system is 0.033 s. D How to det
  • Page 987D. NOMOGRAPHS APPENDIX B–63014EN/02 D Reference Fig. D.2 (b) Nomograph for obtaining approach distance δ1 970
  • Page 988B–63014EN/02 APPENDIX D. NOMOGRAPHS D.3 When servo system delay (by exponential acceleration/deceleration at cutting or caused by the positioning system when a servo motor is used) TOOL PATH AT is accompanied by cornering, a slight deviation is produced between the CORNER tool path (tool center path
  • Page 989D. NOMOGRAPHS APPENDIX B–63014EN/02 Analysis The tool path shown in Fig. D.3 (b) is analyzed based on the following conditions: Feedrate is constant at both blocks before and after cornering. The controller has a buffer register. (The error differs with the reading speed of the tape reader, number o
  • Page 990B–63014EN/02 APPENDIX D. NOMOGRAPHS D Initial value calculation 0 Y0 V X0 Fig. D.3 (c) Initial value The initial value when cornering begins, that is, the X and Y coordinates at the end of command distribution by the controller, is determined by the feedrate and the positioning system time constant
  • Page 991D. NOMOGRAPHS APPENDIX B–63014EN/02 D.4 When a servo motor is used, the positioning system causes an error between input commands and output results. Since the tool advances RADIUS DIRECTION along the specified segment, an error is not produced in linear ERROR AT CIRCLE interpolation. In circular in
  • Page 992E. STATUS WHEN TURNING POWER ON, B–63014EN/02 APPENDIX WHEN CLEAR AND WHEN RESET E STATUS WHEN TURNING POWER ON, WHEN CLEAR AND WHEN RESET Parameter CLR (No. 3402#6) is used to select whether resetting the CNC places it in the cleared state or in the reset state (0: reset state/1: cleared state). Th
  • Page 993E. STATUS WHEN TURNING POWER ON, WHEN CLEAR AND WHEN RESET APPENDIX B–63014EN/02 Item When turning power on Cleared Reset Action in Movement × × × opera- Dwell × × × tion Issuance of M, S and × × × T codes Tool length compensa- × Depending on f : MDI mode tion parameter Other modes depend LVK(No.500
  • Page 994F. CHARACTER–TO–CODES B–63014EN/02 APPENDIX CORRESPONDENCE TABLE F CHARACTER-TO-CODES CORRESPONDENCE TABLE Char- Char- Code Comment Code Comment acter acter A 065 6 054 B 066 7 055 C 067 8 056 D 068 9 057 E 069 032 Space F 070 ! 033 Exclamation mark G 071 ” 034 Quotation mark H 072 # 035 Hash sign I
  • Page 995G. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63014EN/02 G ALARM LIST 1) Program errors (P/S alarm) Number Message Contents 000 PLEASE TURN OFF POWER A parameter which requires the power off was input, turn off power. 001 TH PARITY ALARM TH alarm (A character with incorrect parity was input). Correct the tape. 002 TV PA
  • Page 996B–63014EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM LIST Number Message Contents 029 ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE The offset values specified by H code is too large. Modify the program. 030 ILLEGAL OFFSET NUMBER The offset values specified by D/H code for tool length offset, cutter com- pensation or 3–dimensional cutter compens
  • Page 997G. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63014EN/02 Number Message Contents 055 MISSING MOVE VALUE IN CHF/ In the arbitrary angle chamfering or corner R block, the move distance CNR is less than chamfer or corner R amount. 058 END POINT NOT FOUND In a arbitrary angle chamfering or corner R cutting block, a specifie
  • Page 998B–63014EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM LIST Number Message Contents 086 DR SIGNAL OFF When entering data in the memory by using Reader / Puncher interface, the ready signal (DR) of reader / puncher was off. Power supply of I/O unit is off or cable is not connected or a P.C.B. is de- fective. 087 BUFFER OVER
  • Page 999G. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63014EN/02 Number Message Contents 114 FORMAT ERROR IN MACRO There is an error in other formats than . Modify the program. 115 ILLEGAL VARIABLE NUMBER A value not defined as a variable number is designated in the custom macro or in high–speed cycle cutting. The head
  • Page 1000B–63014EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM LIST Number Message Contents 136 ILLEGAL AXIS COMMAND In index table indexing, another control axis was instructed together with the B axis. Modify the program. 138 SUPERIMPOSED DATA In PMC–based axis control, the increment for pulse distribution on OVERFLOW the CNC an
  • Page 1001G. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63014EN/02 Number Message Contents 160 G72.1 NESTING ERROR Code G72.1 was specified in a sub–program after the same code had already been specified for copying with rotation. 161 G72.2 NESTING ERROR Code G72.2 was specified in a sub–program after the same code had already be
  • Page 1002B–63014EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM LIST Number Message Contents 194 SPINDLE COMMAND IN SYN- A contour control mode, spindle positioning (Cs–axis control) mode, CHRO–MODE or rigid tapping mode was specified during the serial spindle synchronous control mode. Correct the program so that the serial spindle
  • Page 1003G. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63014EN/02 Number Message Contents 231 ILLEGAL FORMAT IN G10 OR L50 Any of the following errors occurred in the specified format at the programmable–parameter input. 1) Address N or R was not entered. 2) A number not specified for a parameter was entered. 3) The axis number
  • Page 1004B–63014EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM LIST Number Message Contents 252 ATC SPINDLE ALARM An error due to excessive deviation occurs in spindle positioning during ATC operation. For details, see diagnosis parameter No.531. (Only for the DRILL–MATE) 253 G05 IS NOT AVAIRABLE Binary–input operation with a high
  • Page 1005G. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63014EN/02 Number Message Contents 5046 ILLEGAL PARAMETER (ST.COMP) An illegal parameter has been specified for straightness compensa- tion. Possible reasons are as follows: 1 There is no axis corresponding to the axis number specified in the move axis or compensation axis p
  • Page 1006B–63014EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM LIST Number Message Contents 5066 RESTART ILLEGAL SEQUENCE During program restart using the return/restart function, a sequence NUMBER number between 7000 and 7999 was read while performing search for the next sequence number. 5067 G05 PO COMMANDED IN G68/G51 HPCC mode
  • Page 1007G. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63014EN/02 Number Message Contents 5122 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN SPIRAL A spiral interpolation or conical interpolation command has an error. Specifically, this error is caused by one of the following: 1) L = 0 is specified. 2) Q = 0 is specified. 3) R/, R/, C is specified. 4) Zer
  • Page 1008B–63014EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM LIST Number Message Contents 5199 FINE TORQUE SENSING PARAME- A parameter related to the fine torque sensing function is illegal. TER · The storage interval is invalid. · An invalid axis number is set as the target axis. Correct the parameter. 5212 SCREEN COPY : PARAME
  • Page 1009G. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63014EN/02 Number Message Contents 5242 ILLEGAL AXIS NUMBER The axis number of the synchronous master axis or slave axis is incor- (M series) rect. (This alarm is issued when flexible synchronization is turned on.) Alternatively, the axis number of the slave axis is smaller
  • Page 1010B–63014EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM LIST Number Message Contents 303 APC alarm: nth–axis framing nth–axis (n=1 to 8) APC framing error. Failure in data transmission. Possible causes include a faulty APC, cable, or servo interface module. 304 APC alarm: nth–axis parity nth–axis (n=1 to 8) APC parity error
  • Page 1011G. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63014EN/02 No. Message Description 385 n AXIS : SERIAL DATA ERROR Communication data from the separate detector cannot be received. (EXT) 386 n AXIS : DATA TRANS. ERROR A CRC or stop bit error occurred in the communication data being (EXT) received from the separate detector
  • Page 1012B–63014EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM LIST Number Message Contents 410 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS – EX- The position deviation value when the n–th axis (axis 1–8) stops is larg- CESS ERROR er than the set value. Refer to procedure of trouble shooting. 411 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS – EX- The position deviation val
  • Page 1013G. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63014EN/02 Number Message Contents 435 n AXIS : INV. LOW VOLT DC LINK SVM: The DC link voltage has dropped. 436 n AXIS : SOFTTHERMAL (OVC) The digital servo software detected the soft thermal state (OVC). 437 n AXIS : CNV. OVERCURRENT PSM: Overcurrent flowed into the input c
  • Page 1014B–63014EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM LIST Number Message Contents 466 n AXIS : MOTOR/AMP COMBINA- The maximum current rating for the amplifier does not match that for TION the motor. 467 n AXIS : ILLEGAL SETTING OF The servo function for the following has not been enabled when an AXIS axis occupying a sin
  • Page 1015G. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63014EN/02 6) Over travel alarms Number Message Contents 500 OVER TRAVEL : +n Exceeded the n–th axis (axis 1 to 8) + side stored stroke limit I. (Parameter No.1320 or 1326 NOTE) 501 OVER TRAVEL : –n Exceeded the n–th axis (axis 1 to 8) – side stored stroke limit I. (Paramete
  • Page 1016B–63014EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM LIST 9) Spindle alarms Number Message Contents 749 S–SPINDLE LSI ERROR It is serial communication error while system is executing after power supply on. Following reasons can be considered. 1) Optical cable connection is fault or cable is not connected or cable is cut.
  • Page 1017G. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63014EN/02 D The details of spindle The details of spindle alarm No. 750 are displayed in the diagnosis display alarm No.750 (No. 409) as shown below. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 409 SPE S2E S1E SHE #3 (SPE) 0 : In the spindle serial control, the serial spindle parameters fulfil
  • Page 1018B–63014EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM LIST SPM No. Message indica- Faulty location and remedy Description tion(*1) 7n04 SPN_n_ : INPUT FUSE/ 04 Check the PSM input power supply The PSM detects open phase of pow- POWER status. er. (PSM alarm indication: 5) FAULT 7n07 SPN_n_ : OVERSPEED 07 Check for a sequen
  • Page 1019G. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63014EN/02 SPM No. Message indica- Faulty location and remedy Description tion(*1) 7n24 SPN_n_ : SERIAL 24 1 Place the CNC–to–spindle cable The CNC power is turned off (normal TRANSFER away from the power cable. power–off or broken cable). ERROR 2 Replace the cable. An error
  • Page 1020B–63014EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM LIST SPM No. Message indica- Faulty location and remedy Description tion(*1) 7n34 SPN_n_ : PARAMETER 34 Correct a parameter value according Parameter data exceeding the allow- SETTING ER- to the manual. able limit is set. ROR If the parameter number is unknown, connect
  • Page 1021G. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63014EN/02 SPM No. Message indica- Faulty location and remedy Description tion(*1) 7n47 SPN_n_ : POS–CODER 47 1 Replace the cable. 1 The A/B phase signal of the SIGNAL AB- 2 Re–adjust the BZ sensor signal. spindle position coder (connector NORMAL 3 Correct the cable layout (
  • Page 1022B–63014EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM LIST 10) System alarms (These alarms cannot be reset with reset key.) Number Message Contents 900 ROM PARITY A parity error occurred in the CNC, macro, or servo ROM. Correct the contents of the flash ROM having the displayed number. 910 SRAM PARITY : (BYTE 0) A RAM par
  • Page 1023B–63014EN/02 Index [Numbers] Canned Grinding Cycle (For Grinding Machine), 232 Change of the Cutter Compensation Value, 293 8–Digit Program Number, 183 Changing Workpiece Coordinate System, 127 Character–to–Codes Correspondence Table, 977 Characters and Codes to be Used for the Pattern Data Input Fu
  • Page 1024Index B–63014EN/02 [D] Dynamic Graphic Display, 910 Data Input/Output, 538, 691 Data Input/Output on the ALL IO Screen, 719 [E] Data Input/Output Using a Memory Card, 745 Editing a Part Program, 531 Decimal Point Programming, 143 Editing of Custom Macros, 781 Deleting a Block, 765 Editing Programs,
  • Page 1025B–63014EN/02 Index Helical Interpolation (G02, G03), 51 [J] Helical Interpolation B (G02, G03), 52 JOG Feed, 577 Help Function, 934 High Speed Cutting Functions, 454 High Speed Skip Signal (G31), 91 [K] High–Precision Contour Control, 464 Key Input and Input Buffer, 565 High–Speed Cycle Cutting, 455
  • Page 1026Index B–63014EN/02 [N] Power On/Off, 571 Preparatory Function (G Function), 35 Next Block Display Screen, 826 Presetting the Workpiece Coordinate System, 816 Nomographs, 966 Processing Macro Statements, 422 Normal Direction Control (G40.1, G41.1, G42.1 or G150, G151, G152), 374 Program Check Screen,
  • Page 1027B–63014EN/02 Index Stored Stroke Check, 677 OFFSET Screens Displayed by Function Key SETTING , 845 Stroke Limit Check Prior to Performing Movement, 681 Subprogram (M98, M99), 179 Screens Displayed by Function key POS , 808 Subprogram Call (M198), 661 Subprogram Call Function (M198), 636 Screens Disp
  • Page 1028Index B–63014EN/02 [U] [W] Unconditional Branch (GOTO Statement), 405 Waiting for Paths, 517 Warning Messages, 566 Word Search, 759 [V] Workpiece Coordinate System, 125 Variables, 386 Workpiece Coordinate System Preset (G92.1), 130 i–6
  • Page 1029Revision Record FANUCĄSeriesĄ16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is–MA OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B–63014EN) D Correction of errors. 02 Apr., 2000 D Addition of Series 160is–MA and 180is–MA. D Addition of “DNC Opration with Memory Card”. 01 Mar., 1997 Edition Date Contents Edition Date Contents
  • Page 1030
  • Page 1031EUROPEAN HEADQUARTERS – BELGIUM / NETHERLANDS GRAND-DUCHÉ DE LUXEMBOURG GE Fanuc Automation Europe S.A. GE Fanuc Automation Europe S.A. - Netherlands Branch - Zone Industrielle Postbus 7230 - NL-4800 GE Breda L-6468 Echternach Minervum 1603A - NL-4817 ZL Breda ( (+352) 727979 - 1 ( (+31) 76-5783 201
  • Page 1032• No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form. • All specifications and designs are subject to change without prior notice. The export of this product is subject to the authorization of the government of the country from where the product is exported. In this manual we have tried as much as
  • Page 1033TECHNICAL REPORT NO.TMN 00/0105E Date Jul. 07, 2000 General Manager of Software Laboratory FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i-MA OPERATOR'S MANUAL Replacement of “15.7 PROCESSING MACRO STATEMENT” explanation 1. Communicate this report to : ○ Your information ○ GE Fanuc-N, GE Fanuc-E FANUC Robotics CINCI
  • Page 1034FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i-MA OPERATOR'S MANUAL Replacement of “15.7 PROCESSING MACRO STATEMENT” explanation 1. Type of applied technical documents Name FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i-MA OPERATOR'S MANUAL Spec. No. / B-63014EN/02 Version 2. Summary of change Group Name / Outline New, Add., Appli
  • Page 10351 Application This report is applied to following CNCs. Series 16i-MA Series 18i-MA Series 160i-MA Series 180i-MA Series 160is-MA Series 180is-MA This report is a supplement for a following manual. FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i-MA OPERATOR'S MANUAL (B-63014EN/02) 2 Outline In the above-mentioned ma
  • Page 10363 Details The explanation of “II programming, 15.7 Processing macro statements” is replaced as follows. 15.7 PROCESSING MACRO STATEMENTS For smooth machining, the CNC prereads the NC statement to be performed next. This operation is referred to as buffering. During AI contour control mode or AI nano
  • Page 1037Buffering the next block in other than cutter > N1 X100.0 ; N1 N4 NC statement execution compensation mode (G41, G42) (normally prereading N2 #1=100 ; N3 #2=200 ; N2 N3 one block) Macro statement execution N4 Y200.0 ; Buffer N4 > : Block being executed : Block read into the buffer When N1 is being e
  • Page 1038When the N1 is being executed, the NC statements in the next two blocks (up to N5) are read into the buffer. Since N5 is a block that involves no movement, an intersection cannot be calculated. In this case, the NC statements in the next three blocks (up to N7) are read. The macro statements (N2, N4
  • Page 1039Currently selected Read #4130(P) The data is read at additional #4014 maximum 3 blocks workpiece (G54 - G59) before a macro coordinate system program. Current position Read #5021 - #5028 The uncertain position (Machine in moving is read. coordinate system) Current position Read #5041 - #5048 The unc
  • Page 1040Example) O0001 O2000 N1 X10.Y10.; (Mxx ;) Specify preventing buffering M code or G53 N2 M98P2000; N100 #1=#5041; (Reading X axis current position) N3 Y200.0; N101 #2=#5042; (Reading Y axis current position) : : M99; In above case, the buffering of N2 block is done and the macro program of O2000 is r
  • Page 1041TECHNICAL REPORT NO.TMN 01/062E Date Apr. 12, 2001 General Manager of Software Development Center FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i-MA OPERATOR'S MANUAL Modification of “Linear interpolation positioning” 1. Communicate this report to : ○ Your information ○ GE Fanuc-N, GE Fanuc-E FANUC Robotics CINCINAT
  • Page 1042FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i-MA OPERATOR'S MANUAL Modification of “Linear interpolation positioning” 1. Type of applied technical documents Name FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i-MA OPERATOR'S MANUAL Spec. No. / B-63014EN/02 Version 2. Summary of change Group Name / Outline New, Add., Applicable Corr
  • Page 10431 Application This report is applied to following CNCs. Series 16i-MA Series 18i-MA Series 160i-MA Series 180i-MA Series 160is-MA Series 180is-MA This report is a supplement for a following manual. FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i-MA OPERATOR'S MANUAL (B-63014EN/02) 2 Outline In the above-mentioned ma
  • Page 1044TECHNICAL REPORT NO.TMN 01/083E Date Jun. 8, 2001 General Manager of Software Development Center FANUC Series 16/18/160/180-TC/MC OPERATOR’S MANUAL FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is - TA/MA OPERATOR’S MANUAL FANUC Series 21i/210i/210is - TA/MA OPERATOR’S MANUAL Changing of “Linear interpola
  • Page 1045FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is-MA OPERATOR’S MANUAL Changing of “Linear interpolation positioning” explanation 1. Type of applied technical documents Name FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is-MA OPERATOR'S MANUAL Spec. No. / B-63014EN/02 Version 2. Summary of change Group Name / Ou
  • Page 10461 Application This report is applied to following CNCs. Series 16i/160i/160is-MA Series 18i/180i/180is-MA This report is a supplement for a following manual. FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is-MA OPERATOR'S MANUAL (B-63014EN/02) 2 Outline In the above-mentioned manuals, the explanation of “4
  • Page 10473 Details The explanation of “4.1 POSITIONING (G00) Linear interpolation positioning” is changed as follows. (Before change) Linear interpolation positioning The tool path is the same as in linear interpolation (G01). The tool is positioned within the shortest possible time at a speed that is not mo
  • Page 1048FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is-MA OPERATOR’S MANUAL Concerning the addition of Optimum Torque acceleration/deceleration 1.Type of applied technical documents Name FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is-MA OPERATOR’S MANUAL Spec.No./Ed. B-63014EN/02 2.Summary of Change New, Add, Appli
  • Page 1049Optimum Torque acceleration/deceleration General This function enables acceleration/deceleration in accordance with the torque characteristics of the motor and the characteristics of the machines due to its friction and gravity and performs linear type positioning with optimum acceleration/decelerat
  • Page 1050Description Optimum torque acceleration/deceleration selects the acceleration pattern set with parameters on the basis of the axial movement direction and the acceleration/deceleration state, determines the acceleration for each axis from the current speed, and controls the tangential acceleration/d
  • Page 1051- Cases in which optimum torque acceleration/deceleration is disabled In case that optimum torque acceleration/deceleration is disabled, acceleration/deceleration for rapid traverse will be after-interpolation acceleration/deceleration or before interpolation acceleration/deceleration. When the comm
  • Page 1052For example, while the speed is between Fa and Fb in the previous figure, the acceleration is calculated with Aa and Ab. Tangential acceleration is controlled not to exceed the calculated acceleration for each axis. Table. (b) Parameters for acceleration pattern Accelera Speed Acceleration parameter
  • Page 1053- Example of setting acceleration pattern data In this example, the machine is equipped with the αM30/4000i . Motor speed at rapid traverse is 3000 (min-1). 120 Torque(Nm 100 80 60 40 20 0 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 -1 Speed(m in ) Fig. (d) Speed-torque characteristics of model M30/4000i Specifications
  • Page 1054Let the torque be x (Nm), the inertia be y(Kgm2), and the ball screw pitch p(mm), then the acceleration A is calculated as follows: x[ N Em] p x([kg Em / sec2 ][m]) p A= × [mm] = × [mm] y[kg Em 2 ] 2ƒÎ y[kg Em 2 ] 2ƒÎ x× p = [mm / sec2 ] 2ƒÎ× y Machine specification is assumed as follows, Ball screw
  • Page 1055Parameter Setting Unit Remarks No. Acceler 19546,19552 18712 0.01 At P1, 90(Nm) can be used for the ation at 19558,19564 % acceleration/deceleration, so set the 2 P1 ratio 7717 (mm/sec ) to 4124 2 (mm/sec ). 1.8712 = 7717/4124 Acceler 19547-19549 0 0.01 0 is set because P2 to P4 are ation at 19553-1
  • Page 1056- Examples of setting if the acceleration pattern differs depending on whether acceleration or deceleration is in progress and whether the movement is in the minus or plus direction From the effect of gravity and friction, torque for acceleration/deceleration is different on each condition, such as
  • Page 1057(1) In case of plus move (up) and acceleration Because torque of Gravity and friction work against the output torque of motor, the torque for acceleration/deceleration is as follows. Maximum torque : 70(=100-20-10) (Nm) Speed: 0 to 2000 (min-1) Torque at rapid traverse : 49(=79-20-10) (Nm) Speed: 30
  • Page 1058(2) In case of plus move (up) and deceleration Because torque of Gravity and friction work forward to the output torque of motor, the torque for acceleration/deceleration is as follows. Maximum torque : 130(=100+20+10) (Nm) Speed: 0 to 2000 (min-1) Torque at rapid traverse : 109(=79+20+10) (Nm) Spee
  • Page 1059(3) In case of minus move (down) and acceleration Because torque of Gravity works forward to the output torque of motor and torque of friction works against the output torque of motor, torque for acceleration/deceleration is as follows. Maximum torque : 110(=100+20-10) (Nm) Speed: 0 to 2000 (min-1)
  • Page 1060(4) In case of minus move (down) and deceleration Because torque of Gravity works against the output torque of motor and torque of friction works forward to the output torque of motor, torque for acceleration/deceleration is as follows. Maximum torque : 90(=100-20+10) (Nm) Speed: 0 to 2000 (min-1) T
  • Page 1061Limitations - Linear type positioning When Optimum torque acceleration/deceleration is enabled, linear type positioning for rapid traverse is selected automatically in AI high precision contour control and AI nano high precision contour control mode even if the parameter LRP, bit 1 of parameter No.
  • Page 1062FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is - MA OPERATOR’S MANUAL FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i - MB OPERATOR’S MANUAL Explanation change and addition of Rigid tapping 1.Type of applied technical documents FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is - MA OPERATOR’S MANUAL Name FANUC Series 16i/18i/1
  • Page 106313.2.1 Rigid Tapping Cycle (G84) 13.2.2 Left-Handed Rigid Tapping Cycle (G74) The description of “FS15-format command” is changed and the description is added to “S command”. Explanations FS15-format command Rigid tapping can be performed using FS15-format commands. The rigid tapping sequence (Inclu
  • Page 1064TECHNICAL REPORT (MANUAL) NO. TMN 02/022E Date 2002. General Manager of Software Laboratory Alarm for FANUC SERVO MOTOR βseries I/O Link Option (FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is – MA OPERATOR’S MANUAL) (FANUC Series 16i/160i/160is – MB,18i/180i/180is – MB5,18i/180i/180is – MB OPERATOR’S MA
  • Page 1065Alarm for FANUC SERVO MOTOR β series I/O Link Option (FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is – MA OPERATOR’S MANUAL) (FANUC Series 16i/160i/160is – MB,18i/180i/180is – MB5,18i/180i/180is – MB OPERATOR’S MANUAL) １．Type of applied technical documents FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is – MA
  • Page 1066Please add the following description in ”APPENDIX G. ALARM LIST” . 12) ALARM FOR FANUC SERVO MOTOR β series I/O Link Option Alarm for FANUC SERVO MOTOR β series I/O Link Option can be confirmed by Power Mate CNC Manager function. Number Alarm type 000 to 299 Program or setting alarm 300 to 399, 401
  • Page 1067No. LED display Description Countermeasure Input data 2 is invalid. Check input data 2, specified with a function 251 code. A function code or mode is invalid. Check the command code, specified with a 254 function code. Check the mode. Operation cannot be activated because an Check the mode. Check w
  • Page 1068No. LED display Description Countermeasure A soft phase alarm (SPHAL) was detected. Turn the power off. This alarm may be caused 308 by noise. When the absolute pulse coder is used, the Rotate the motor through more than one turn 319 motor has not yet rotated through more than in jog feed mode, then
  • Page 1069No. LED display Description Countermeasure The servo position error in the stop state is Determine the mechanical cause of the large 410 larger than the value specified in parameter position error. If no mechanical cause is found, No.110. specify a larger value for the parameter. The servo position
  • Page 1070No. LED display Description Countermeasure [SVU-40, SVU-80] This alarm is issued in the following cases: An overcurrent alarm or IPM alarm is issued. • This alarm is issued when an excessively large current flows in the main circuit. • This alarm is issued when an error (overcurrent, overheat, low I
  • Page 1071No. LED display Description Countermeasure A DC link low voltage alarm is issued. This alarm is issued when the DC voltage of the main circuit power is too low. (1) 190 ms or longer may pass from the time when both the *ESP of the built-in DI and the *ESP of the I/O link interface signal are cancele
  • Page 1072System alarms No. LED display Description Countermeasure An error was detected in the RAM write/read Replace the servo amplifier unit. - test at power-up. An error was detected in the data collation Turn the power off then back on. Then, - check for the non-volatile memory. re-enter the parameters.
  • Page 1073TECHNICAL REPORT NO.TMN 02/074E Date July 30, 2002 General Manager of Software Development Center FANUC Series 16i/18i-MA/MB Concerning the addition of Optimum Torque Acceleration/Deceleration 1. Communicate this report to: ○ Your information ○ GE Fanuc-N, GE Fanuc-E FANUC Robotics CINCINATI MILACRO
  • Page 1074FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is-MA OPERATOR’S MANUAL Concerning the addition of Optimum Torque acceleration/deceleration 1.Type of applied technical documents Name FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is-MA OPERATOR’S MANUAL Spec.No./Ed. B-63014EN/02 2.Summary of Change New, Add, Appli
  • Page 1075Optimum Torque acceleration/deceleration General This function enables acceleration/deceleration in accordance with the torque characteristics of the motor and the characteristics of the machines due to its friction and gravity and performs linear type positioning with optimum acceleration/decelerat
  • Page 1076Description Optimum torque acceleration/deceleration selects the acceleration pattern set with parameters on the basis of the axial movement direction and the acceleration/deceleration state, determines the acceleration for each axis from the current speed, and controls the tangential acceleration/d
  • Page 1077- Cases in which optimum torque acceleration/deceleration is disabled In case that optimum torque acceleration/deceleration is disabled, acceleration/deceleration for rapid traverse will be after-interpolation acceleration/deceleration or before interpolation acceleration/deceleration. When the comm
  • Page 1078For example, while the speed is between Fa and Fb in the previous figure, the acceleration is calculated with Aa and Ab. Tangential acceleration is controlled not to exceed the calculated acceleration for each axis. Table. (b) Parameters for acceleration pattern Accelera Speed Acceleration parameter
  • Page 1079- Example of setting acceleration pattern data In this example, the machine is equipped with the αM30/4000i . Motor speed at rapid traverse is 3000 (min-1). 120 100 Torque(Nm) 80 60 40 20 0 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 -1 Speed(m in ) Fig. (d) Speed-torque characteristics of model αM30/4000i Specifications
  • Page 1080Let the torque be x (Nm), the inertia be y(Kgm2), and the ball screw pitch p(mm), then the acceleration A is calculated as follows: x[ N・m] p x([kg・m / sec2 ][m]) p A= × [mm] = × [mm] y[kg・m 2 ] 2π y[kg・m 2 ] 2π x× p = [mm / sec2 ] 2π × y Machine specification is assumed as follows, Ball screw pitch
  • Page 1081Table. (c) Example of setting parameters related to acceleration pattern Parameter Setting Unit Remarks No. Rapid 1420 48000. mm/ The ball screw pitch is assumed 16 traverse min mm, so that the rapid traverse rate rate is 48000 mm/min at the maximum −1 speed 3000 (min ). Referen 1773 194 msec Refere
  • Page 1082With the above parameter settings, the acceleration pattern will be shown as the following figure. The acceleration is calculated according to the following figure in case speed is up to 2474 (mm/min), the acceleration is 7716 (mm/sec2) in case speed is from 2474 (mm/min) up to 32000 (mm/min), and a
  • Page 1083- Examples of setting if the acceleration pattern differs depending on whether acceleration or deceleration is in progress and whether the movement is in the minus or plus direction From the effect of gravity and friction, torque for acceleration/deceleration is different on each condition, such as
  • Page 1084(1) In case of plus move (up) and acceleration Because torque of Gravity and friction work against the output torque of motor, the torque for acceleration/deceleration is as follows. Maximum torque : 70(=100-20-10) (Nm) Speed: 0 to 2000 (min-1) Torque at rapid traverse : 49(=79-20-10) (Nm) Speed: 30
  • Page 1085(2) In case of plus move (up) and deceleration Because torque of Gravity and friction work forward to the output torque of motor, the torque for acceleration/deceleration is as follows. Maximum torque : 130(=100+20+10) (Nm) Speed: 0 to 2000 (min-1) Torque at rapid traverse : 109(=79+20+10) (Nm) Spee
  • Page 1086(3) In case of minus move (down) and acceleration Because torque of Gravity works forward to the output torque of motor and torque of friction works against the output torque of motor, torque for acceleration/deceleration is as follows. Maximum torque : 110(=100+20-10) (Nm) Speed: 0 to 2000 (min-1)
  • Page 1087(4) In case of minus move (down) and deceleration Because torque of Gravity works against the output torque of motor and torque of friction works forward to the output torque of motor, torque for acceleration/deceleration is as follows. Maximum torque : 90(=100-20+10) (Nm) Speed: 0 to 2000 (min-1) T
  • Page 1088Limitations - Linear type positioning When Optimum torque acceleration/deceleration is enabled, linear type positioning for rapid traverse is selected automatically in AI high precision contour control and AI nano high precision contour control mode even if the parameter LRP, bit 1 of parameter No.
  • Page 1089TECHNICAL REPORT NO.TMN 02/081E Date Aug. 21, 2002 General Manager of Software Development Center FANUC Series 16/18-MA/MB/MC FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i-MA/MB,18i-MB5 FANUC Series 0-M/0i-MA/21-MB/20i-FA Concerning the correction of Rigid tapping (G84) / Left-handed rigid tapping cycle (G74) 1. Communi
  • Page 1090FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is-MA OPERATOR'S MANUAL FANUC Series 16i/160i/160is-MB,18i/180i/180is-MB/MB5 OPERATOR'S MANUAL FANUC Series 21i/210i/210is-MA OPERATOR'S MANUAL FANUC Series 21i/210i-MB OPERATOR'S MANUAL FANUC Series 0i-MA OPERATOR'S MANUAL FANUC Series 20i-FA OPERATOR'S MANUA
  • Page 1091Outline Descriptions are changed as follows. 1. The description of "Thread lead" on "13.2.1 Rigid tapping (G84)" is replaced. 2. The description of "Thread lead" on "13.2.2 Left-Handed Rigid tapping Cycle (G74)" is replaced. Details 1. The description of "Thread lead" on "13.2.1 Rigid tapping (G84)"
  • Page 1092TECHNICAL REPORT NO.TMN 03/011E Date : Feb.06.’03 General Manager of Software Development Center FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is - MA OPERATOR’S MANUAL FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i - MB OPERATOR’S MANUAL FANUC Series 18i/180i/180is - MB OPERATOR’S MANUAL FANUC Series 21i/210i/210is - MA
  • Page 1093FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is - MA OPERATOR’S MANUAL FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i - MB OPERATOR’S MANUAL Concerning addition of the Changing Active Offset Value with Manual Move 1.Type of applied technical documents FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is - MA OPERATOR’S MANUAL Nam
  • Page 1094• Adding “FANUC Series 16i /18i /21i – MA / MB Changing Active Offset Value with Manual Move (A-78535E)” to this description (Attached papers) FANUC Series 16i /18i /21i – MA / MB Changing Active Offset Value with Manual Move (A-78535E) 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is - MA 16i/18i/160i/180i - MB OPERA
  • Page 1095FANUC Series 16i /18i /21i – MA/MB Changing Active Offset Value with Manual Move Index 1. Outline ........................................................................................................................... 2 2. Explanation..............................................................
  • Page 10961. Outline If you want to perform roughing or semi-finishing with a single tool, you may fine-adjust the tool length compensation or cutter compensation. Moreover, you may want to fine-adjust the setting of the workpiece origin offset that was already set up. This function can change the offset (suc
  • Page 1097Example The compensation value set at Z-axis of the offset number 10 becomes 54.700 + (-2.583) = 52.117 mm under the following conditions: • Specified H code: H10 • Value set at Z-axis of the offset number 10: 54.700 mm • Amount of movement caused by manual feed along the Z-axis: -2.583 mm 2.4 Chang
  • Page 1098Example Assume the following conditions: • Specified workpiece coordinate system: G56 • G56 workpiece origin offset (X-axis): 50.000 • G56 workpiece origin offset (Y-axis): -60.000 • G56 workpiece origin offset (Z-axis): 5.000 • G56 workpiece origin offset (C-axis): 180.000 • Amount of manual feed-b
  • Page 10992.7 Presetting the relative position indicator Setting parameter APL (No. 3115#5) to 1 can preset the relative position indicator (counter) to 0 automatically when active offset change mode is selected. In this case, performing manual feed until the relative position indicator (counter) becomes 0 ca
  • Page 11003. Signal Active offset change mode signal CHGAO [Classification] Input signal [Function] This signal selects the manual feed-based active offset change mode. [Operation] Setting this signal to "1" selects the manual feed-based active offset change mode. • Automatic operation is at pause or
  • Page 1101Signal addresses • Parameter No.5040#2(MOP)=0 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G0297 AOFS2 AOFS1 CHGAO #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F0297 MCHAO • Parameter No.5040#2(MOP)=1 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G0203 AOFS2 AOFS1 CHGAO #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F0199 MCHAO The following timing chart shows how the input and signal
  • Page 11024. Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3115 APL [ Input type ] Parameter input [ Data type ] Bit axis APL Specifies whether to preset the relative position indicator automatically when the manual feed-based active offset change mode is selected, as follows: 0: Do not preset. 1: Preset. This signal is
  • Page 1103#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5041 AOF [ Input type ] Parameter input [ Data type ] Bit AOF When the manual feed-based active offset change mode is selected in a reset state or a cleared state, the tool compensation: 0: Can be changed 1: Cannot be changed However, even if “1” is set in parameter CLR(No.34
  • Page 1104#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3409 CFH [ Input type ] Parameter input [ Data type ] Bit CFH When bit 6(CLR) of parameter No.3402 is 1, the reset button on the MDI panel, the external reset signal, the reset and rewind signal, or emergency stop will, 0: Clear F codes, H codes, D codes. 1: Not clear F codes
  • Page 1105TECHNICAL REPORT NO.TMN 00/104E Date Jun. 29, 2000 General Manager of Software Laboratory FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i-MA The correction of OPERATOR'S MANUAL 1. Communicate this report to : • Your information • GE Fanuc-N, GE Fanuc-E FANUC Robotics CINCINATI MILACRON • Machine tool builder Sales a
  • Page 1106FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i-MA The correction of OPERATOR'S MANUAL 1. Type of applied technical documents Name FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i-MA OPERATOR'S MANUAL Spec. No. / B-63014EN/02 Version 2. Summary of change Group Name / Outline New, Add., Applicable Correct, Date Delete Basic Function O
  • Page 11071 Application This report is applied to following CNCs. Series 16i-MA Series 18i-MA Series 160i-MA Series 180i-MA Series 160is-MA Series 180is-MA This report is a supplement for a following manual. FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i-MA OPERATOR'S MANUAL (B-63014EN/02) 2 Outline In the above-mentioned ma
  • Page 11083 Details 3.1 “II programming, 3 Preparatory function (G code), Table 3 G code list” is corrected as the following list. Table 3 G code list G code Group Function G00 Positioning G01 Linear interpolation Circular interpolation/Helical interpolation/ G02 Spiral interpolation/Conical interpolation CW
  • Page 1109G code Group Function G20 Input in inch 06 G21 Input in mm G22 Stored stroke check function on 04 G23 Stored stroke check function off G25 Spindle speed fluctuation detection off 19 G26 Spindle speed fluctuation detection on G27 Reference position return check G28 Return to reference position G29 Re
  • Page 1110G code Group Function G50 Scaling cancel 11 G51 Scaling G50.1 Programmable mirror image cancel 22 G51.1 Programmable mirror image G52 Local coordinate system setting 00 G53 Machine coordinate system selection G54 Workpiece coordinate system 1 selection 14 G54.1 Additional workpiece coordinate system
  • Page 1111G code Group Function Canned cycle cancel/External operation function cancel/ G80 Hobbing machine function cancel/EGB cancel Drilling cycle, spot boring cycle/External operation function/ G81 Hobbing machine function/EGB Drilling cycle or counter boring cycle/C–axis servo delay G82 compensation canc